WO2006110187A2 - Methods and compositions for the treatment of anxiety disorders - Google Patents

Methods and compositions for the treatment of anxiety disorders Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2006110187A2
WO2006110187A2 PCT/US2005/043177 US2005043177W WO2006110187A2 WO 2006110187 A2 WO2006110187 A2 WO 2006110187A2 US 2005043177 W US2005043177 W US 2005043177W WO 2006110187 A2 WO2006110187 A2 WO 2006110187A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
furosemide
ester
group
bumetanide
piretanide
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2005/043177
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2006110187A3 (en
Inventor
Daryl W. Hochman
John J. Partridge
Original Assignee
Neurotherapeutics Pharma Llc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US11/101,000 external-priority patent/US8722668B2/en
Priority claimed from US11/130,945 external-priority patent/US20060025387A1/en
Application filed by Neurotherapeutics Pharma Llc filed Critical Neurotherapeutics Pharma Llc
Priority to EP05852434A priority Critical patent/EP1874286A4/en
Priority to CA002604446A priority patent/CA2604446A1/en
Priority to JP2008505285A priority patent/JP2008535836A/en
Publication of WO2006110187A2 publication Critical patent/WO2006110187A2/en
Publication of WO2006110187A3 publication Critical patent/WO2006110187A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/16—Amides, e.g. hydroxamic acids
    • A61K31/18—Sulfonamides
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/185—Acids; Anhydrides, halides or salts thereof, e.g. sulfur acids, imidic, hydrazonic or hydroximic acids
    • A61K31/19—Carboxylic acids, e.g. valproic acid
    • A61K31/195—Carboxylic acids, e.g. valproic acid having an amino group
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/335—Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin
    • A61K31/34—Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin having five-membered rings with one oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. isosorbide
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/40—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. sulpiride, succinimide, tolmetin, buflomedil
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/41—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with two or more ring hetero atoms, at least one of which being nitrogen, e.g. tetrazole
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/44—Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/495—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with two or more nitrogen atoms as the only ring heteroatoms, e.g. piperazine or tetrazines
    • A61K31/505—Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/54—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with at least one nitrogen and one sulfur as the ring hetero atoms, e.g. sulthiame
    • A61K31/549—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with at least one nitrogen and one sulfur as the ring hetero atoms, e.g. sulthiame having two or more nitrogen atoms in the same ring, e.g. hydrochlorothiazide
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/18—Antipsychotics, i.e. neuroleptics; Drugs for mania or schizophrenia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/22—Anxiolytics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/24—Antidepressants

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to methods and compositions for treating selected conditions of the central and peripheral nervous systems employing non-synaptic mechanisms. More specifically, the present invention relates to methods and compositions for treating neuropsychiatric disorders by administering agents that modulate expression and/or activity of sodium-potassium-chloride co-transporters.
  • Neuropathic pain and nociceptive pain differ in their etiology, pathophysiology, diagnosis and treatment.
  • Nociceptive pain occurs in response to the activation of a specific subset of peripheral sensory neurons, the nociceptors. It is generally acute (with the exception of arthritic pain), self-limiting and serves a protective biological function by acting as a warning of on-going tissue damage. It is typically well localized and often has an aching or throbbing quality. Examples of nociceptive pain include post-operative pain, sprains, bone fractures, burns, bumps, bruises, inflammation (from an infection or arthritic disorder), obstructions and myofascial pain. Nociceptive pain can usually be treated with opioids and non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDS).
  • NSAIDS non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs
  • Neuropathic pain is a common type of chronic, non-malignant, pain, which is the result of an injury or malfunction in the peripheral or central nervous system and serves no protective biological function. It is estimated to affect more than 1.6 million people in the U.S. population. Neuropathic pain has many different etiologies, and may occur, for example, due to trauma, diabetes, infection with herpes zoster (shingles), HIV/AIDS peripheral neuropathies, late-stage cancer, amputation (including mastectomy), carpal tunnel syndrome, chronic alcohol use, exposure to radiation, and as an unintended side- effect of neurotoxic treatment agents, such as certain anti-HIV and chemotherapeutic drugs.
  • neuropathic pain In contrast to nociceptive pain, neuropathic pain is frequently described as “burning”, “electric”, “tingling” or “shooting” in nature. It is often characterized by chronic allodynia (defined as pain resulting from a stimulus that does not ordinarily elicit a painful response, such as light touch) and hyperalgesia (defined as an increased sensitivity to a normally painful stimulus), and may persist for months or years beyond the apparent healing of any damaged tissues.
  • Neuropathic pain is difficult to treat.
  • Analgesic drugs that are effective against normal pain e.g., opioid narcotics and non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs
  • drugs that have activity in neuropathic pain are not usually effective against nociceptive pain.
  • the standard drugs that have been used to treat neuropathic pain appear to often act selectively to relieve certain symptoms but not others in a given patient (for example, relief of allodynia, but not hyperalgesia). For this reason, it has been suggested that successful therapy may require the use of multiple different combinations of drugs and individualized therapy (see, for example, Bennett, Hosp. Pract. (Off Ed). 33:95-98, 1998).
  • Treatment agents typically employed in the management of neuropathic pain include tricylic antidepressants (for example, amitriptyline, imipramine, desimipramine and clomipramine), systemic local anesthetics, and anti-convulsants (such as phenytoin, carbamazepine, valproic acid, clonazepam and gabapentin).
  • tricylic antidepressants for example, amitriptyline, imipramine, desimipramine and clomipramine
  • systemic local anesthetics such as phenytoin, carbamazepine, valproic acid, clonazepam and gabapentin.
  • anti-convulsants originally developed for the treatment of epilepsy and other seizure disorders have found application in the treatment of non-epileptic conditions, including neuropathic pain, mood disorders (such as bipolar affective disorder), and schizophrenia (for a review of the use of anti-epileptic drugs in the treatment of non-epileptic conditions, see Rogawski and Loscher, Nat. Medicine, 10:685- 692, 2004).
  • neuropathic pain and affective disorders have a common pathophysiological mechanism (Rogawski & Loscher, ibid; Ruscheweyh & Sandkuhler, Pain 105:327-338, 2003), namely a pathological increase in neuronal excitability, with a corresponding inappropriately high frequency of spontaneous firing of neurons.
  • antiepileptic drugs are effective in treating neuropathic pain, and furthermore such antiepileptic drugs are only effective in certain subsets of patients with neuropathic pain (McCleane, Expert. Opin. Pharmacother. 5: 1299-1312, 2004).
  • Epilepsy is characterized by abnormal discharges of cerebral neurons and is typically manifested as various types of seizures.
  • Epileptiform activity is identified with spontaneously occurring synchronized discharges of neuronal populations that can be measured using electrophysiological techniques. This synchronized activity, which distinguishes epileptiform from non-epileptiform activity, is referred to as "hypersynchronization" because it describes the state in which individual neurons become increasingly likely to discharge in a time-locked manner with one another.
  • Hypersynchronized activity is typically induced in experimental models of epilepsy by either increasing excitatory or decreasing inhibitory synaptic currents, and it was therefore assumed that hyperexcitability per se was the defining feature involved in the generation and maintenance of epileptiform activity.
  • neuropathic pain was believed to involve conversion of neurons involved in pain transmission from a state of normal sensitivity to one of hypersensitivity (Costigan & Woolf, JnI. Pain 1 :35-44, 2000).
  • the focus on developing treatments for both epilepsy and neuropathic pain has thus been on suppressing neuronal hyperexcitability by either: (a) suppressing action potential generation; (b) increasing inhibitory synaptic transmission; or (c) decreasing excitatory synaptic transmission.
  • Neuropsychiatric disorders including anxiety disorders, are generally treated by counseling and/or with drugs. Many of the drugs currently employed in the treatment of such disorders have significant negative side effects, such as tendencies to induce dependence.
  • the cation-chloride co-transporters are important regulators of neuronal chloride concentration that are believed to influence cell-to-cell communication, and various aspects of neuronal development, plasticity and trauma.
  • the CCC gene family consists of three broad groups: Na + -Cl " co-transporters (NCCs), K + -Cl " co-transporters (KCCs) and Na + -K + -2C1 ' co-transporters (NKCCs).
  • NCCs Na + -Cl " co-transporters
  • KCCs K + -Cl " co-transporters
  • NKCCs Na + -K + -2C1 ' co-transporters
  • Two NKCC isoforms have been identified: NKCC l is found in a wide variety of secretory epithelia and non-epithelial cells, whereas NKCC2 is principally expressed in the kidney.
  • NKCCIa splice variants of the Slcl2a2 gene that encodes NKCCl
  • NKCCIb two splice variants of the Slcl2a2 gene that encodes NKCCl
  • the NKCCl a gene has 27 exons, while the splice variant NKCCIb lacks exon 21.
  • the NKCCIb splice variant is expressed primarily in the brain.
  • NKCCIb is believed to be more than 10% more active than NKCCIa, although it is proportionally present in a much smaller amount in the brain than is NKCCIa. It has been suggested that differential splicing of the NKCCl transcript may play a regulatory role in human tissues (Vibat et al. Anal. Biochem. 298:218-230, 2001). Na-K-Cl co- transport in all cell and tissues is inhibited by loop diuretics, including furosemide, bumetanide and benzmetanide.
  • Na-K-2C1 co-transporter knock-out mice have been shown to have impaired nociception phenotypes as well as abnormal gait and locomotion (Sung et al. JnI. Neurosci. 20:7531-7538, 2000). Delpire and Mount have suggested that NKCCl may be involved in pain perception ⁇ Ann. Rev. Physiol. 64:803-843, 2002). Laird et al. recently described studies demonstrating reduced stroking hyperalgesia in NKCCl knock-out mice compared to wild-type and heterozygous mice ⁇ Neurosci. Letts. 361 :200-203, 2004).
  • neuropathic pain target synaptic activity in excitatory pathways by, for example, modulating the release or activity of excitatory neurotransmitters, potentiating inhibitory pathways, blocking ion channels involved in impulse generation, and/or acting as membrane stabilizers.
  • Conventional agents and therapeutic approaches for the treatment of neuropathic pain and neuropsychiatric disorders thus reduce neuronal excitability and inhibit synaptic firing.
  • One serious drawback of these therapies is that they are nonselective and exert their actions on both normal and abnormal neuronal populations. This leads to negative and unintended side effects, which may affect normal CNS functions, such as cognition, learning and memory, and produce adverse physiological and psychological effects in the treated patient.
  • the treatment compositions and methods of the present invention are useful for treating conditions including neuropathic pain and neuropsychiatric disorders, such as bipolar disorders, anxiety disorders (including panic disorder, social anxiety disorder, obsessive compulsive disorder, posttraumatic stress disorder, generalized anxiety disorder and specific phobia (American Psychiatric Association, Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 4 lh edition - Text Revision, 2000)), depression and schizophrenia, , that are characterized by neuronal hypersynchrony.
  • neuropathic pain and neuropsychiatric disorders such as bipolar disorders, anxiety disorders (including panic disorder, social anxiety disorder, obsessive compulsive disorder, posttraumatic stress disorder, generalized anxiety disorder and specific phobia (American Psychiatric Association, Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 4 lh edition - Text Revision, 2000)
  • depression and schizophrenia that are characterized by neuronal hypersynchrony.
  • compositions and methods may be employed to reduce neuronal hypersynchrony associated with neuropathic pain and/or neuropsychiatric disorders without suppressing neuronal excitability, thereby avoiding the unwanted side effects often associated with agents currently employed for the treatment of neuropathic pain and neuropsychiatric disorders.
  • the methods and compositions disclosed herein generally involve via non- synaptic mechanisms and modulate, generally reduce, the synchronization of neuronal population activity.
  • the synchronization of neuronal population activity is modulated by manipulating anionic concentrations and gradients in the central and/or peripheral nervous systems.
  • the inventive compositions are capable of reducing the effective amount, inactivating, and/or inhibiting the activity of a Na + -K + -2C1 ' (NKCC) co-transporter.
  • NKCC Na + -K + -2C1 '
  • Especially preferred treatment agents of the present invention exhibit a high degree of NKCC co-transporter antagonist activity in cells of the central and/or peripheral nervous system, e.g., glial cells, Schwann cells and/or neuronal cell populations, and exhibit a lesser degree of activity in renal cell populations.
  • the inventive compositions are capable of reducing the effective amount, inactivating, and/or inhibiting the activity of the co-transporter NKCCl .
  • NKCCl antagonists are especially preferred treatment agents for use in the inventive methods.
  • NKCC co-transporter antagonists that may be usefully employed in the inventive treatment compositions include, but are not limited to, CNS-targeted NKCC co- transporter antagonists such as furosemide, bumetanide, ethacrynic acid, torsemide, azosemide, muzolimine, piretanide, tripamide and the like, as well as thiazide and thiazide-like diuretics, such as bendroflumethiazide, benzthiazide, chlorothiazide, hydrochlorothiazide, hydroflumethiazide, methylclothiazide, polythiazide, trichlormethiazide, chlorthalidone, indapamide, metolazone and quinethazone, together with analogs and functional derivatives of such components.
  • CNS-targeted NKCC co- transporter antagonists such as furosemide, bumetanide, ethacrynic acid,
  • Analogs of CNS-targeted NKCC co-transporter antagonists such as furosemide, bumetanide, piretanide, azosemide and torsemide that may be usefully employed in the inventive compositions and methods include those provided below as Formulas I-V.
  • the inventors believe that such analogs have increased lipophilicity and reduced diuretic effects compared to the CNS-targeted NKCC co-transporter antagonists from which they are derived and thus result in fewer undesirable side effects when employed in the inventive treatment methods.
  • the level of diuresis that occurs following administration of an effective amount of an analog provided below as Formula I-V is less than 99%, 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20% or 10% of that which occurs following administration of an effective amount of the parent molecule from which the analog is derived.
  • the analog may be less diuretic than the parent molecule when administered at the same mg/kg dose.
  • the analog may be more potent than the parent molecule from which it is derived, so that a smaller dose of the analog is required for effective relief of symptoms, thereby eliciting less of a diuretic effect.
  • the analog may have a longer duration of effect in treating disorders than the parent molecule, so that the analog may be administered less frequently than the parent molecule, thus leading to a lower total diuretic effect within any given period of time.
  • treatment agents that may be usefully employed in the inventive compositions and methods include, but are not limited to: antibodies, or antigen-binding fragments thereof, that specifically bind to NKCCl ; soluble NKCCl ligands; small molecule inhibitors of NKCCl; anti-sense oligonucleotides to NKCCl ; NKCCl -specific small interfering RNA molecules (siRNA or RNAi); and engineered soluble NKCCl molecules.
  • such antibodies, or antigen-binding fragments thereof, and small molecule inhibitors of NKCCl specifically bind to the domains of NKCCl involved in bumetanide binding, as described, for example, in Haas and Forbush II, Annu. Rev. Physiol. 62:515-534, 2000.
  • the polypeptide sequence for human NKCCl is provided in SEQ ID NO: 1, with the corresponding cDNA sequence being provided in SEQ ID NO: 2.
  • the inventive treatment agents of the present invention employ "non- synaptic" mechanisms, little or no suppression of neuronal excitability occurs. More specifically, the inventive treatment agents cause little (less than a 1% change compared to pre-administration levels) or no suppression of action potential generation or excitatory synaptic transmission. In fact, a slight increase in neuronal excitability may occur upon administration of certain of the inventive treatment agents. This is in marked contrast to conventional anti-epileptic drugs currently used in the treatment of neuropathic pain, which do suppress neuronal excitability.
  • the methods and treatment agents of the present invention affect the synchronization, or relative synchrony, of neuronal population activity. Preferred methods and treatment agents modulate the extracellular anionic chloride concentration and/or the gradients in the central or peripheral nervous system to reduce neuronal synchronization, or relative synchrony, without substantially affecting neuronal excitability.
  • the present invention relates to methods and agents for relieving neuropathic pain, or the abnormal perception of pain, by affecting or modulating spontaneous hypersynchronized bursts of neuronal activity and the propagation of action potentials or conduction of impulses in certain cells and nerve fibers of the peripheral nervous system, for example, primary sensory afferent fibers, pain fibers, dorsal horn neurons, and supraspinal sensory and pain pathways.
  • inventive treatment agents may be employed in combination with other, known, treatment agents, such as those presently used in the treatment of neuropsychiatric disorders.
  • treatment agents such as those presently used in the treatment of neuropsychiatric disorders.
  • One of skill in the art will appreciate that the combination of a treatment agent of the present invention with another, known, treatment agent may involve both synaptic and non-synaptic mechanisms.
  • Treatment compositions and methods of the present invention may be used therapeutically and episodically following the onset of symptoms or prophylactically, prior to the onset of specific symptoms.
  • treatment agents of the present invention can be used to treat existing neuropathic pain or to protect nerves from neurotoxic injury and neuropathic pain secondary to chemotherapy, radiotherapy, exposure to infectious agents, and the like.
  • the treatment agents employed in the inventive methods are capable of crossing the blood brain barrier, and/or are administered using delivery systems that facilitate delivery of the agents to the central nervous system.
  • various blood brain barrier (BBB) permeability enhancers can be used, if desired, to transiently and reversibly increase the permeability of the blood brain barrier to a treatment agent.
  • Such BBB permeability enhancers may include leukotrienes, bradykinin agonists, histamine, tight junction disruptors (e.g., zonulin), hyperosmotic solutions (e.g., mannitol), cytoskeletal contracting agents, short chain alkylglycerols (e.g., l-O- pentylglycerol), and others which are currently known in the art.
  • Figs. IA, IAl , IB, IBl , 1C, ICl and ID show the effect of furosemide on stimulation evoked after discharge activity in rat hippocampal slices.
  • Figs. 2A - 2R show furosemide blockade of spontaneous epileptiform burst discharges across a spectrum of in vitro models.
  • Figs. 3A - 3H show furosemide blockade of kainic acid-evoked electrical "status epilepticus" in urethane-anesthetized rats, with EKG recordings shown in the upper traces and cortical EEG recordings shown in the bottom traces.
  • Figs. 4A and 4B show a schematic diagram of ion co-transport under conditions of reduced chloride concentration.
  • Fig. 5 shows that significantly less freezing was observed in animals treated with either bumetanide or furosemide than in animals receiving vehicle alone in a test of contextual fear conditioning in rats.
  • Fig. 6 shows baseline startle amplitudes in a fear potentiated startle test in rats
  • Fig. 7 shows the amplitude of response in rats on startle alone trials determined immediately following administration of either DMSO alone, bumetanide or furosemide.
  • Fig. 8 shows the difference score (startle alone - fear potentiated startle) on the test day in rats treated with either DMSO, bumetanide or furosemide
  • Fig. 9 shows the startle alone amplitude in rats one week after administration of either DMSO, bumetanide or furosemide.
  • Fig. 10 shows the difference score in rats one week after administration of either
  • Fig. 11 shows the difference score (startle alone - fear potentiated startle) on the test day in rats treated with one of the following bumetanide analogs: bumetanide N 5 N- diethylglycolamide ester (referred to as 2MIK053); bumetanide methyl ester (referred to as 3MIK054); bumetanide N,N-dimethylglycolamide ester (referred to as 3MIK069-11); bumetanide morpholinodethyl ester (referred to as 3MIK066-4); bumetanide pivaxetil ester (referred to as 3MIK069-12); bumetanide cyanomethyl ester (referred to as
  • 3MIK047) bumetanide dibenzylamide (referred to as 3MIK065); and bumetanide 3-
  • Fig. 12 shows the difference score in rats treated with different doses of bumetanide.
  • Fig. 13 shows the output of urine in rats following administration of either bumetanide from two different sources (columns 1 and 5), bumetanide N ,N- diethylglycolamide ester (column 2), bumetanide pivaxetil ester (column 3), bumetanide cyanomethyl ester (column 4) of saline (column 6).
  • preferred treatment agents and methods of the present invention for use in treating neuropathic pain and/or neuropsychiatric disorders, modulate or disrupt the synchrony of neuronal population activity in areas of heightened synchronization by reducing the activity of NKCC co-transporters.
  • movement of ions and modulation of ionic gradients by means of ion-dependent co-transporters, preferably cation-chloride dependent co-transporters is critical to regulation of neuronal synchronization.
  • Chloride co-transport function has long been thought to be directed primarily to movement of chloride out of cells.
  • the sodium independent transporter which has been shown to be neuronally localized, moves chloride ions out of neurons.
  • Blockade of this transporter leads to hyperexcitability, which is the short-term response to cation-chloride co-transporters such as furosemide.
  • the long-term response to furosemide demonstrates that the inward, sodium- dependent movement of chloride ions, mediated by the glial associated Na + -K + -2C1 ⁇ co- transporter NKCCl, plays an active role in blocking neuronal synchronization, without affecting excitability and stimulus-evoked cellular activity.
  • Haglund and Hochman have demonstrated that furosemide is able to block epileptic activity in humans while not affecting normal brain activity (J. Neurophysiol. (Feb. 23, 2005) doi: 10.1152/ jn.00944.2004).
  • NKCCIb is more active than the NKCCIa variant.
  • a central or peripheral nervous system which expresses a few more percentage NKCCIb may thus be more prone to disorders such as neuropathic pain and epilepsy.
  • a treatment agent that is more specific for NKCCIb compared to NKCCIa may be more effective in the treatment of such disorders.
  • the inventive methods may be used for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of neuropathic pain having, for example, the following etiologies: alcohol abuse; diabetes; eosinophilia-myalgia syndrome; Guillain-Barre syndrome; exposure to heavy metals such as arsenic, lead, mercury, and thallium; HIV/AIDS; exposure to anti-HIV/AIDS drugs; malignant tumors; medications including amiodarone, aurothioglucose, cisplatinum, dapsone, stavudine, zalcitabine, didanosine, disulfiram, FK506, hydralazine, isoniazid, metronidazole, nitrofurantoin, paclitaxel, phenytoin and vincristine; monoclonal gammopathies; multiple sclerosis; post-stroke central pain, postherpetic neuralgia; trauma including carpal tunnel syndrome, cervical or lumbar radiculopathy, complex
  • compositions that may be effectively employed in the inventive methods are capable of reducing the effective amount, inactivating, and/or inhibiting the activity of a Na + -K + -2Cr (NKCC) co-transporter.
  • NKCC Na + -K + -2Cr
  • compositions are capable of reducing the effective amount, inactivating, and/or inhibiting the activity of the co- transporter NKCCl.
  • the inventive compositions comprise at least one treatment agent selected from the group consisting of: antagonists of NKCCl (including but not limited to, small molecule inhibitors of NKCCl, antibodies, or antigen- binding fragments thereof, that specifically bind to NKCCl and soluble NKCCl ligands); anti-sense oligonucleotides to NKCCl; NKCCl -specific small interfering RNA molecules (siRNA or RNAi); and engineered soluble NKCCl molecules.
  • NKCCl including but not limited to, small molecule inhibitors of NKCCl, antibodies, or antigen- binding fragments thereof, that specifically bind to NKCCl and soluble NKCCl ligands
  • anti-sense oligonucleotides to NKCCl NKCCl -specific small interfering RNA molecules (siRNA or RNAi); and engineered soluble NKCCl molecules.
  • the treatment agent is selected from the group consisting of: CNS-targeted NKCC co-transporter antagonists such as furosemide, bumetanide, ethacrynic acid, torsemide, azosemide, muzolimine, piretanide, tripamide and the like; thiazide and thiazide-like diuretics, such as bendroflumethiazide, benzthiazide, chlorothiazide, hydrochlorothiazide, hydro-flumethiazide, methylclothiazide, polythiazide, trichlormethiazide, chlorthalidone, indapamide, metolazone and quinethazone; and analogs and functional derivatives of such components.
  • CNS-targeted NKCC co-transporter antagonists such as furosemide, bumetanide, ethacrynic acid, torsemide, azosemide, muzolimine, pir
  • Ri is not present, H or O;
  • R 2 is H or when Ri is O, is selected from the group consisting of: alkylaminodialkyl, alkylaminocarbonyldialkyl, alkyloxycarbonylalkyl, alkylaldehyde, alkylketoalkyl, alkylamide, an alkylammonium group, alkylcarboxylic acid, alkylheteroaryls, alkylhydroxy, a biocompatible polymer such as alkyloxy(polyalkyloxy)alkylhydroxyl, a polyethylene glycol (PEG), a polyethylene glycol ester (PEG ester), a polyethylene glycol ether (PEG ether), methyloxyalkyl, methyloxyalkaryl, methylthioalkylalkyl and methylthioalkaryl, unsubstituted or substituted, and when Ri is not present, R 2 is selected from the group consisting of: hydrogen, dialkylamino, diarylamino, dialkylaminodialkyl,
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of: aryl, halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, and aryloxy, unsubstituted or substituted; and R 4 and R5 are each independently selected from the group consisting of: hydrogen, alkylaminodialkyl, alkylhydroxyaminodiakyl, unsubstituted or substituted:
  • the analog can be bumetanide aldehyde, bumetanide dibenzylamide, bumetanide diethylamide, bumetanide morpholinoethyl ester, bumetanide 3-(dimethylaminopropyl) ester, bumetanide N,N- diethylglycolamide ester, bumetanide dimethylglycolamide ester, bumetanide pivaxetil ester, bumetanide methoxy(polyethyleneoxy) n -i -ethyl ester,_bumetanide benzyltrimethyl- ammonium salt, and bumetanide cetyltrimethylammonium salt.
  • the analog can be furosemide aldehyde, furosemide ethyl ester, furosemide cyanomethyl ester, furosemide benzyl ester, furosemide morpholinoethyl ester, furosemide 3-(dimethylaminopropyl) ester, furosemide N,N-diethylglycolamide ester, furosemide dibenzylamide, furosemide benzyltrimethylammoniurn salt, furosemide cetyltrimethylammonium salt, furosemide N,N-dimethylglycolamide ester, furosemide methoxy(polyethyleneoxy) n -i -ethyl ester, furosemide pivaxetil ester and furosemide propaxetil ester.
  • the analog can be piretanide aldehyde, piretanide methyl ester, piretanide cyanomethyl ester, piretanide benzyl ester, piretanide morpholinoethyl ester, piretanide 3-(dimethylaminopropyl) ester, piretanide N,N-diethylglycolamide ester, piretanide diethylamide, piretanide dibenzylamide, piretanide benzylltrimethylammonium salt, piretanide cetylltrimethylarnrnonium salt, piretanide N,N-dimethylglycolamide ester, piretanide methoxy(polyethyleneoxy) n -i -ethyl ester, piretanide pivaxetil ester and/or piretanide propaxe
  • R. 3 , R 4 and R 5 are defined above;
  • Re is selected from the group consisting of: alkyloxycarbonylalkyl, alkylaminocarbonyldialkyl, alkylaminodialkyl, alkylhydroxy, a biocompatible polymer such as alkyloxy(polyalkyloxy)alkylhydroxyl, a polyethylene glycol (PEG), a polyethylene glycol ester (PEG ester), a polyethylene glycol ether (PEG ether), methyloxyalkyl, methyloxyalkaryl, methylthioalkyl and methylthioalkaryl, unsubstituted or substituted.
  • PEG polyethylene glycol
  • PEG ester polyethylene glycol ester
  • PEG ether polyethylene glycol ether
  • the analog may be selected from the group consisting of: tetrazolyl-substituted azosemides (such as methoxymethyl tetrazolyl-substituted azosemides, methylthiomethyl tetrazolyl-substituted azosemides and N-mPEG350-tetrazolyl-substituted azosemides), azosemide benzyltrimethylammonium salt and/or azosemide cetyltrimethylammonium salt.
  • tetrazolyl-substituted azosemides such as methoxymethyl tetrazolyl-substituted azosemides, methylthiomethyl tetrazolyl-substituted azosemides and N-mPEG350-tetrazolyl-substituted azosemides
  • PEG ester polyethylene glycol ester
  • the analog may be selected from the group consisting of: pyridine-substituted torsemide quaternary ammonium salts or the corresponding inner salts (zwitterions). Examples include, but are not limited to, methoxymethyl pyridinium torsemide salts, methylthiomethyl pyridinium torsemide salts and N-mPEG350-pyridinium torsemide salts.
  • Modification of the CNS-targeted NKCC co-transport antagonists employed in the inventive methods can include reacting the antagonist with a functional group and/or compound selected from the group consisting of: an aluminum hydride, alkyl halide, alcohol, aldehyde, aryl halide, alkyl amide, aryl amine and quaternary ammonium salt, unsubstituted or substituted, or combinations thereof.
  • a functional group and/or compound selected from the group consisting of: an aluminum hydride, alkyl halide, alcohol, aldehyde, aryl halide, alkyl amide, aryl amine and quaternary ammonium salt, unsubstituted or substituted, or combinations thereof.
  • a functional group and/or compound selected from the group consisting of: an aluminum hydride, alkyl halide, alcohol, aldehyde, aryl halide, alkyl amide, aryl amine and quaternary ammoni
  • alkyl refers to a straight or branched chain saturated or partially unsaturated hydrocarbon radical.
  • alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl and the like.
  • unsaturated is meant the presence of 1 , 2 or 3 double or triple bonds, or a combination thereof.
  • alkyl groups may be optionally substituted as described below.
  • alkylene refers to a straight or branched chain having two terminal monovalent radical centers derived by the removal of one hydrogen atom from each of the two terminal carbon atoms of straight-chain parent alkane.
  • aryl refers to an aromatic group or to an optionally substituted aromatic group fused to one or more optionally substituted aromatic groups, optionally substituted with suitable substituents including, but not limited to, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylsulfanyl, lower alkylsulfenyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, oxo, hydroxy, mercapto, amino optionally substituted by alkyl, carboxy, tetrazolyl, carbamoyl optionally substituted by alkyl, aminosulfonyl optionally substituted by alkyl, acyl, aroyl, heteroaroyl, acyloxy, aroyloxy, heteroaroyloxy, alkoxycarbonyl, nitro, cyano, halogen, or lower perfluoroalkyl, multiple degrees of substitution being allowed.
  • aryl examples include, but are not limited to, phenyl, 2-naphthyl, 1-naphthyl, and the like.
  • halo refers to bromo, chloro, fluoro or iodo.
  • halide refers to bromide, chloride, fluoride or iodide.
  • alkoxy refers to an alkyl group, as defined herein, appended to the parent molecular moiety through an oxy group.
  • alkoxy include, but are not limited to, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, 2-propoxy, butoxy, tert-butoxy, pentyloxy, hexyloxy and the like.
  • aryloxy refers to the group -ArO wherein Ar is aryl or heteroaryl. Examples include, but are not limited to, phenoxy, benzyloxy and 2- naphthyloxy.
  • amino refers to -NH 2 in which one or both of the hydrogen atoms may optionally be replaced by alkyl or aryl or one of each, optionally substituted.
  • alkylthio refers to an alkyl group, as defined herein, appended to the parent molecular moiety through a sulfur moiety.
  • Representative examples of alkylthio include, but are not limited to, methylthio, ethylthio, n-propylthio, isopropylthio, n-butylthio, and the like.
  • carrier refers to the group -CO 2 H.
  • quaternary ammonium refers to a chemical structure having four bonds to the nitrogen with a positive charge on the nitrogen in the "onium” state, i.e., "R 4 N + or "quaternary nitrogen,” wherein R is an organic substituent such as alkyl or aryl.
  • quaternary ammonium salt refers to the association of the quaternary ammonium with a cation.
  • substituted refers to replacement of one or more of the hydrogen atoms of the group replaced by substituents known to those skilled in the art and resulting in a stable compound as described below.
  • suitable replacement groups include, but are not limited to, alkyl, acyl, alkenyl, alkynyl cycloalkyl, aryl, hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, acyl, amino, amido, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, carboxyaryl, halo, oxo, mercapto, sulf ⁇ nyl, sulfonyl, sulfonamido, amidino, carbamoyl, dialkoxymethyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, carboxylic acid, carboxamido, haloalkyl, alkylthio, aralkyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylthio,
  • solvate as used herein is intended to refer to a pharmaceutically acceptable solvate form of a specified compound that retains the biological effectiveness of such compound, for example, resulting from a physical association of the compound with one or more solvent molecules.
  • solvates include compounds of the invention in combination with water, isopropanol, ethanol, methanol, DMSO, ethyl acetate, acetic acid, or ethanolamine.
  • hydrate refers to the compound when the solvent is water.
  • biocompatible polymer refers to a polymer moiety that is substantially non-toxic and does not tend to produce substantial immune responses, clotting or other undesirable effects.
  • Polyalkylene glycol is a biocompatible polymer where, as used herein, polyalkylene glycol refers to straight or branched polyalkylene glycol polymers such as polyethylene glycol, polypropylene glycol, and polybutylene glycol, and further includes the monoalkylether of the polyalkylene glycol.
  • the polyalkylene glycol polymer is a lower alkyl polyalkylene glycol moiety such as a polyethylene glycol moiety (PEG), a polypropylene glycol moiety, or a polybutylene glycol moiety.
  • PEG has the formula - HO(CH2CH2 ⁇ ) n H, where n can range from about 1 to about 4000 or more. In some embodiments, n is 1 to 100, and in other embodiments, n is 5 to 30.
  • the PEG moiety can be linear or branched. In further embodiments, PEG can be attached to groups such as hydroxyl, alkyl, aryl, acyl or ester.
  • PEG can be an alkoxy PEG, such as methoxy-PEG (or mPEG), where one terminus is a relatively inert alkoxy group, while the other terminus is a hydroxyl group.
  • alkoxy PEG such as methoxy-PEG (or mPEG)
  • mPEG mPEG
  • the compounds of formula I, II, III, IV and/or V can be synthesized using traditional synthesis techniques well known to those skilled in the art. More specific synthesis routes are described below.
  • the bumetanide analogs are synthesized by reacting the carboxylic acid moiety of bumetanide with various reagents.
  • bumetanide may undergo esterification via reaction with alcohols, including linear, branched, substituted, or unsubstituted alcohols.
  • Bumetanide may also be alkylated via reaction with suitable substituted and unsubstituted alkyl halides and aryl halides, including chloroacetonitrile, benzyl chloride, l -(dimethylamino)propyl chloride, 2-chloro-N,N-diethylacetamide, and the like.
  • PEG- type esters may be formed by alkylation using alkyloxy(polyalkyloxy)alkyl halides such as MeO-PEG350-Cl and the like, or alkyloxy(polyalkyloxy)alkyl tosylates such as MeO- PEGlOOO-OTs and the like.
  • "Axetil"-type esters may also be formed by alkylation using alkyl halides such as chloromethyl pivalate or chloromethyl propionate.
  • Bumetanide may also undergo amidation by reaction with suitable substituted or unsubstituted alkyl amines or aryl amines, either after conversion to the acid chloride or by using an activator, such as l-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylarninopropyl)carbodiimide (EDC). Bumetanide may also be reacted with a quaternary ammonium hydroxide, such as benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide or cetyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, to form bumetanide quaternary ammonium salts.
  • Schemes 1 and 7 below presents a synthesis scheme of some exemplary compounds according to formula I.
  • furosemide analogs are synthesized by methods analogous to those used in the synthesis of the bumetanide analogs. Specifically, furosemide may undergo esterification via reaction with alcohols, including linear, branched, substituted, or unsubstituted alcohols Furosemide may also be alkylated via reaction with suitable substituted and unsubstituted alkyl hahdes and aryl hahdes, including for example, chloroacetonit ⁇ le, benzyl chloride, 1 -(dimethylamino)propyl chloride, 2-chloro-N,N- diethylacetamide, and the like.
  • PEG-type esters may be formed by alkylation using alkyloxy(polyalkyloxy)alkyl hahdes such as MeO-PEG350-Cl and the like, or alkyloxy(polyalkyloxy)alkyl tosylates such as MeO-PEGlOOO-OTs and the like.
  • "Axetil"-type esters may also be formed by alkylation using alkyl halides such as chloromethyl pivalate or chloromethyl propionate.
  • Furosemide may also undergo amidation by reaction with suitable substituted or unsubstituted alkyl amines or aryl amines, either after conversion to the acid chloride or by using an activator, such as 1- ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide (EDC). Furosemide may also be reacted with a quaternary ammonium hydroxide, such as benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide or cetyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, to form furosemide quaternary ammonium salts.
  • Scheme 2 below presents a synthesis scheme of some exemplary compounds according to formula II.
  • piretamde analogs are synthesized by methods analogous to those used in the synthesis of the bumetanide analogs Specifically, piretamde may undergo este ⁇ fication via reaction with alcohols, including linear, branched, substituted, or unsubstituted alcohols Piretamde may also be alkylated via reaction with suitable substituted and unsubstituted alkyl hahdes and aryl hahdes, including chloroacetonit ⁇ le, benzyl chloride,
  • PEG- type esters may be formed by alkylation using alkyloxy(polyalkyloxy)alkyl hahdes such as MeO-PEG350-Cl and the like, or alkyloxy(polyalkyloxy)alkyl tosylates such as MeO-
  • PEGIOOO-OTs and the like "Axetil"-type esters may also be formed by alkylation by using alkyl halides such as chloromethyl pivalate or chloromethyl propionate.
  • Piretanide may also undergo amidation by reaction with suitable substituted or unsubstituted alkyl amines or aryl amines, either after conversion to the acid chloride or by using an activator, such as l-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide (EDC).
  • EDC l-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide
  • Piretanide may also be reacted with a quaternary ammonium hydroxide, such as benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide or cetyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, to form piretanide quaternary ammonium salts.
  • a quaternary ammonium hydroxide such as benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide or cetyltrimethylammonium hydroxide
  • azosemide analogs are synthesized by the reaction of various reagents with the tetrazolyl moiety of azosemide.
  • Azosemide may undergo hydroxyalkylation with the addition of an aldehyde, whereby a hydroxylalkyl functionality is formed.
  • An alcohol may optionally be reacted along with the aldehyde to obtain an ether.
  • An alkyl thiol may optionally be added with the aldehyde to form a thioether.
  • Azosemide may also be alkylated by the addition of suitable alkyl halides or aryl halides, including alkyl or aryl halides comprising an ether or thioether linkage, such as methyl chloromethyl ether and benzyl chloromethyl thioether.
  • PEG-type ethers may be formed by alkylation using alkyloxy(polyalkyloxy)alkyl halides such as MeO-PEG350-Cl and the like, or alkyloxy(polyalkyloxy)alkyl tosylates such as MeO-PEGlOOO-OTs and the like.
  • Azosemide may also be formed via addition of alkyl or aryl halides, such as chloromethyl pivalate or chloromethyl propionate.
  • Azosemide may be reacted with a quaternary ammonium salt, such as benzyltrimethylammoniumbromide and base such as sodium hydroxide or cetyltrimethylammonium bromide and base such as sodium hydroxide, in order to form an azosemide quaternary ammonium salt.
  • Scheme 4 below presents a synthesis scheme of some exemplary compounds according to formula IV.
  • torsemide (also known as torasemide) analogs are synthesized by the reaction of various reagents with the pyridine moiety of torsemide Torsemide may undergo alkylation by the addition of suitable alkyl or aryl hahdes, including benzyl chloride, to form N-substituted quaternary ammonium salts
  • Alkyl hahdes and aryl hahdes comprising an ether linkage, including methyl chloromethyl ether and benzyl chloromethyl ether may be used to form N-substituted ether quaternary ammonium salts
  • Alkyl hahdes and aryl hahdes comprising a thioether linkage, including methyl chloromethyl thioether and benzyl chloromethyl thioether may be used to form N- substituted thioether quaternary ammonium salts.
  • PEG-type ether-containing quaternary ammonium salts may be formed by alkylation using alkyloxy(polyalkyloxy)alkyl halides such as.MeO-PEG350-Cl and the like, or alkyloxy(polyalkyloxy)alkyl tosylates such as MeO-PEGlOOO-OTs and the like.
  • "Axetil"-type quaternary ammonium salts may also be formed via the addition of alkyl halides such as chloromethyl pivalate or chloromethyl propionate.
  • Scheme 5 below presents a synthesis scheme of some exemplary compounds according to formula V.
  • the substituted benzoic acids bumetanide, piretanide and furosemide can be selectively reduced to the corresponding bumetanide aldehyde, piretanide aldehyde and furosemide aldehyde using amine-substituted ammonium hydrides such as bis(4- methylpiperazinyl)aluminum hydride by literature methods See Muraki, M. and
  • R 3 O-aryl
  • R 3 O-aryl
  • piretanide PEG esters OCH 2 CH 2 (OCH 2 CH 2 ) n .,-Y
  • R 3 O-aryl
  • n 1 - 100
  • torsemide torsemide methyl PEG ether quaternary ammonium salts
  • R 7 (CH 2 ) m OCH 2 CH 2 (OCH 2 CH 2 ) n .
  • Starting materials for synthesizing compounds of the present invention can further include compounds described in U.S. Patent No. 3,634,583 to Feit; U.S. Patent No. 3,806,534 to Fiet; U.S. Patent No. 3,058,882 to Struem et al.; U.S. Patent No.
  • Compounds of the present invention can include isomers, tautomers, zwitterions, enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates or stereochemical mixtures thereof.
  • the term "isomers” as used herein refers to compounds having the same number and kind of atoms, and hence the same molecular weight, but differing with respect to the arrangement or configuration of the atoms in space. Additionally, the term “isomers” includes stereoisomers and geometric isomers.
  • stereoisomer or “optical isomer” as used herein refer to a stable isomer that has at least one chiral atom or restricted rotation giving rise to perpendicular dissymmetric planes (e.g., certain biphenyls, allenes, and spiro compounds) and can rotate plane-polarized light. Because asymmetric centers and other chemical structures can exist in some of the compounds of the present invention which may give rise to stereoisomerism, the invention contemplates stereoisomers and mixtures thereof.
  • the compounds of the present invention and their salts can include asymmetric carbon atoms and may therefore exist as single stereoisomers, racemates, and as mixtures of enantiomers and diastereomers.
  • such compounds will be prepared as a racemic mixture. If desired, however, such compounds can be prepared or isolated as pure stereoisomers, i.e. as individual enantiomers or diastereomers, or as stereoisomer-enriched mixtures.
  • Tautomers are readily interconvertible constitutional isomers and there is a change in connectivity of a ligand, as in the keto and enol forms of ethyl acetoacetate.
  • the inventive methods and compositions may employ tautomers of any of said compounds.
  • Zwitterions are inner salts or dipolar compounds possessing acidic and basic groups in the same molecule. At neutral pH, the cation and anion of most zwitterions are equally ionized.
  • the present invention further provides prodrugs comprising the compounds described herein.
  • prodrug is intended to refer to a compound that is converted under physiological conditions, by solvolysis or metabolically, to a specified compound that is pharmaceutically/pharmacologically active.
  • the prodrug can be a compound of the present invention that has been chemically derivatized such that: (i) it retains some, all or none of the bioactivity of its parent drug compound, and (ii) it is metabolized in a subject to yield the parent drug compound.
  • the prodrug of the present invention may also be a "partial prodrug" in that the compound has been chemically derivatized such that: (i) it retains some, all or none of the bioactivity of its parent drug compound, and (ii) it is metabolized in a subject to yield a biologically active derivative of the compound.
  • the prodrugs can be formed utilizing a hydrolyzable coupling to the compounds described herein. A further discussion of prodrugs can be found in Ettmayer et al. J. Med. Chem. 47( 10):2394-2404 (2004).
  • Prodrugs of the present invention are capable of passage across the blood-brain barrier and may undergo hydrolysis by CNS esterases to provide the active compound.
  • the prodrugs provided herein may also exhibit improved bioavailability, improved aqueous solubility, improved passive intestinal absorption, improved transporter-mediated intestinal absorption, protection against accelerated metabolism, tissue-selective delivery and/or passive enrichment in the target tissue.
  • Prodrugs of the present invention can include compounds according to formula I, II, III, IV and/or V described herein.
  • Prodrugs of the present invention can further include bumetanide, bumetanide dibenzylamide, bumetanide diethylamide, bumetanide morpholinoethyl ester, bumetanide 3-(dimethylaminopropyl) ester, bumetanide N,N- diethylglycolamide ester, bumetanide dimethylglycolamide ester, bumetanide pivaxetil ester, furosemide, furosemide ethyl ester, furosemide cyanomethyl ester, furosemide benzyl ester, furosemide morpholinoethyl ester, furosemide 3-(dimethylaminopropyl) ester, furosemide N,N-diethylglycolamide ester, furosemide dibenzylamide, furosemide benzyltri
  • prodrugs can be formed by attachment of biocompatible polymers, such as those previously described including polyethylene glycol (PEG), to compounds of the present invention using linkages degradable under physiological conditions.
  • PEG polyethylene glycol
  • Attachment of PEG to proteins can be employed to reduce immunogenicity and/or extend the half-life of the compounds provided herein. Any conventional PEGylation method can be employed, provided that the PEGylated agent retains pharmaceutical activity.
  • compositions of the subject invention are suitable for human and veterinary applications and are preferably delivered as pharmaceutical compositions.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions comprise one or more treatment agents, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and a physiologically acceptable carrier.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable salt refers to a salt form of a compound permitting its use or formulation as a pharmaceutical and which retains the biological effectiveness of the free acid and base of the specified compound and is not biologically or otherwise undesirable. Examples of such salts are described in Handbook of Pharmaceutical Salts: Properties, Selection, and Use, Wermuth, CG. and Stahl, P. H. (eds.), Wiley-Verlag Helvetica Acta, Zurich, 2002 [ISBN 3-906390-26-8].
  • salts include alkali metal salts and addition salts of free acids and bases.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, but are not limited to, sulfates, pyrosulfates, bisulfates, sulfites, bisulfites, phosphates, monohydrogen-phosphates, dihydrogen phosphates, metaphosphates, pyrophosphates, chlorides, bromides, iodides, acetates, propionates, decanoates, caprylates, acrylates, formates, isobutyrates, caproates, heptanoates, propiolates, oxalates, malonates, succinates, suberates, sebacates, fumarates, maleates, butyne-l,4-dioates, hexyne-l,6-dioates, benzoates, chlorobenzoates, methylbenzoates, dinitrobenzoates, hydroxybenzoates, methoxybenzo
  • compositions of the present invention may also contain other compounds, which may be biologically active or inactive.
  • one or more treatment agents of the present invention may be combined with another agent, in a treatment combination, and administered according to a treatment regimen of the present invention.
  • Such combinations may be administered as separate compositions, combined for delivery in a complementary delivery system, or formulated in a combined composition, such as a mixture or a fusion compound.
  • the aforementioned treatment combination may include a BBB permeability enhancer and/or a hyperosmotic agent.
  • compositions for oral administration may be, for example, solid preparations such as tablets, sugar-coated tablets, hard capsules, soft capsules, granules, powders and the like, with suitable carriers and additives being starches, sugars, binders, diluents, granulating agents, lubricants, disintegrating agents and the like. Because of their ease of use and higher patient compliance, tablets and capsules represent advantageous oral dosage forms for many medical conditions.
  • compositions for liquid preparations include solutions, emulsions, dispersions, suspensions, syrups, elixirs, and the like with suitable carriers and additives being water, alcohols, oils, glycols, preservatives, flavoring agents, coloring agents, suspending agents, and the like.
  • suitable carriers and additives being water, alcohols, oils, glycols, preservatives, flavoring agents, coloring agents, suspending agents, and the like.
  • Typical preparations for parenteral administration comprise the active ingredient with a carrier such as sterile water or parenterally acceptable oil including polyethylene glycol, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, lecithin, arachis oil or sesame oil, with other additives for aiding solubility or preservation may also be included.
  • a carrier such as sterile water or parenterally acceptable oil including polyethylene glycol, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, lecithin, arachis oil or sesame oil, with other additives for aiding solubility or preservation may
  • compositions according to embodiments of the present invention include those suitable for oral, rectal, topical, nasal, inhalation (e.g., via an aerosol) buccal (e.g., sub-lingual), vaginal, topical (i.e., both skin and mucosal surfaces, including airway surfaces), transdermal administration and parenteral (e.g., subcutaneous, intramuscular, intradermal, intraarticular, intrapleural, intraperitoneal, intrathecal, intracerebral, intracranially, intraarterial, or intravenous), although the most suitable route in any given case will depend on the nature and severity of the condition being treated and on the nature of the particular active agent which is being used.
  • compositions of the present invention are particularly suitable for oral, sublingual, parenteral, implantation, nasal and inhalational administration.
  • Compositions for injection will include the active ingredient together with suitable carriers including propylene glycol-alcohol-water, isotonic water, sterile water for injection (USP), emulPhorTM-alcohol-water, cremophor-ELTM or other suitable carriers known to those skilled in the art.
  • suitable carriers including propylene glycol-alcohol-water, isotonic water, sterile water for injection (USP), emulPhorTM-alcohol-water, cremophor-ELTM or other suitable carriers known to those skilled in the art.
  • carriers may be used alone or in combination with other conventional solubilizing agents such as ethanol, a glycol, or other agents known to those skilled in the art.
  • the compounds of the present invention may be used by dissolving or suspending in any conventional diluent.
  • the diluents may include, for example, physiological saline, Ringer's solution, an aqueous glucose solution, an aqueous dextrose solution, an alcohol, a fatty acid ester, glycerol, a glycol, an oil derived from plant or animal sources, a paraffin and the like. These preparations may be prepared according to any conventional method known to those skilled in the art.
  • Compositions for nasal administration may be formulated as aerosols, drops, powders and gels.
  • Aerosol formulations typically comprise a solution or fine suspension of the active ingredient in a physiologically acceptable aqueous or non-aqueous solvent. Such formulations are typically presented in single or multidose quantities in a sterile form in a sealed container.
  • the sealed container can be a cartridge or refill for use with an atomizing device.
  • the sealed container may be a unitary dispensing device such as a single use nasal inhaler, pump atomizer or an aerosol dispenser fitted with a metering valve set to deliver a therapeutically effective amount, which is intended for disposal once the contents have been completely used.
  • the dosage form comprises an aerosol dispenser, it will contain a propellant such as a compressed gas, air as an example, or an organic propellant including a fluorochlorohydrocarbon or fluorohydrocarbon.
  • compositions suitable for buccal or sublingual administration include tablets, lozenges and pastilles, wherein the active ingredient is formulated with a carrier such as sugar and acacia, tragacanth or gelatin and glycerin.
  • compositions for rectal administration include suppositories containing a conventional suppository base such as cocoa butter.
  • compositions suitable for transdermal administration include ointments, gels and patches.
  • compositions known to those skilled in the art can also be applied for percutaneous or subcutaneous administration, such as plasters.
  • compositions comprising the active ingredient or ingredients in admixture with components necessary for the formulation of the compositions
  • other conventional pharmacologically acceptable additives may be incorporated, for example, excipients, stabilizers, antiseptics, wetting agents, emulsifying agents, lubricants, sweetening agents, coloring agents, flavoring agents, isotonicity agents, buffering agents, antioxidants and the like.
  • additives there may be mentioned, for example, starch, sucrose, fructose, dextrose, lactose, glucose, mannitol, sorbitol, precipitated calcium carbonate, crystalline cellulose, carboxymethylcellulose, dextrin, gelatin, acacia, EDTA, magnesium stearate, talc, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, sodium metabisulfite, and the like.
  • kits including one or more containers comprising pharmaceutical dosage units comprising an effective amount of one or more compounds of the present invention.
  • the essential active ingredient therein may be combined with various sweetening or flavoring agents, coloring matter or dyes and, if desired, emulsifying or suspending agents, together with diluents such as water, ethanol, propylene glycol, glycerin and combinations thereof.
  • compositions described herein may be administered as part of a sustained release formulation.
  • sustained release formulations may generally be prepared using well-known technology and administered by, for example, oral, rectal or transdermal delivery systems, or by implantation of a formulation or therapeutic device at one or more desired target site(s).
  • Sustained-release formulations may contain a treatment composition comprising an inventive treatment agent alone, or in combination with a second treatment agent, dispersed in a carrier matrix and/or contained within a reservoir surrounded by a rate controlling membrane.
  • Carriers for use within such formulations are biocompatible, and may also be biodegradable.
  • the sustained release formulation provides a relatively constant level of active composition release.
  • the sustained release formulation is contained in a device that may be actuated by the subject or medical personnel, upon onset of certain symptoms, for example, to deliver predetermined dosages of the treatment composition.
  • the amount of the treatment composition contained within a sustained release formulation depends upon the site of implantation, the rate and expected duration of release, and the nature of the condition to be treated or prevented.
  • compositions of the present invention for treatment of neuropathic pain and neuropsychiatric disorders are administered using a formulation and a route of administration that facilitates delivery of the treatment composition(s) to the central nervous system.
  • Treatment compositions such as NKCCl antagonists, may be formulated to facilitate crossing of the blood brain barrier as described above, or may be co-administered with an agent that crosses the blood brain barrier.
  • Treatment compositions may be delivered in liposome formulations, for example, that cross the blood brain barrier, or may be co-administered with other compounds, such as bradykinins, bradykinin analogs or derivatives, or other compounds, such as SERAPORTTM, that cross the blood brain barrier.
  • treatment compositions of the present invention may be delivered using a spinal tap that places the treatment composition directly in the circulating cerebrospinal fluid.
  • a bolus iv injection of 20 mg furosemide reduces or abolishes both spontaneous interictal activity and electrical stimulation-evoked epileptiform activity in human patients who are refractory to antiepileptic drugs (AEDs) (Haglund & Hochman J. Neurophysiol. (Feb. 23, 2005) doi: 10.1 152/ jn.00944.2004).
  • AEDs antiepileptic drugs
  • dosages and frequency of administration of the therapeutic compositions disclosed herein, as well as dosages vary according to the indication, and from individual to individual, and may be readily determined by a physician from information that is generally available, and by monitoring patients and adjusting the dosages and treatment regimen accordingly using standard techniques.
  • appropriate dosages and treatment regimen provide the active coinposition(s) in an amount sufficient to provide therapeutic and/or prophylactic benefit. Dosages and treatment regimen may be established by monitoring improved clinical outcomes in treated patients as compared to non-treated patients.
  • the term "effective amount” or “effective” is intended to designate a dose that causes a ieiicf o e symptoms of a disease or disorder as noted through clinical testing and evaluation, patient observation, and/or the like. "Effective amount” or “effective” fur* her can farther designate a dose that causes a detectable change in biological or chemical activity. The detectable changes 1 may be detected and/or further quantified by one skilled in the an for the relevant mechanism or process. ⁇ Moreover, "effective amount” or ' “ effective” can designate an amount that, maintains a desired. physiological ..state.. i.e., reduces or prevents significant decline and/or promotes. improvement in the condition of interest.
  • Therapeutically effective dosages and treatment regimen will depend on the condition, the severity of the condition, and the general state of the patient being treated. Since the pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics of the treatment compositions of the present invention vaiy in different patients, a preferred method for determining a therapeutically effective dosage in a patient is to gradually escalate the dosage and moni'or the clinical and laboratory indicia.
  • the two or more agents are coadministered such that each of the agents is present in a therapeutically effective amount for sufficient time to produce a therapeutic or prophylactic effect.
  • coadministration is intended to encompass simultaneous or sequential administration of two or more agents in the same formulation or unit dosage form nr in separate formulations. Appropriate dosages and treatment regimen for treatment of acute episodic conditions, chronic conditions, or prophylaxis will necessarily vary to accommodate the condition of the patient.
  • furosemide may be administered orally to a patient in amounts of 10-40 mg at a frequency of 1-3 times per day, preferably in an amount of 40 mg three times per day.
  • bumetanide may be administered orally for the treatment of neuropathic pain in amounts of 1-10 mg at a frequency of 1-3 times per day.
  • smaller doses may be employed, for example, in pediatric applications.
  • bumetanide analogs according to the present invention may be administered in amounts of 1.5 to 6 mg daily, for example 1 tablet or capsule three times a day.
  • furosemide analogs according to the present invention may be administered in amounts of 60 to 240 mg/day, for example 1 tablet or capsule three times a day.
  • piretanide analogs according to the present invention may be administered in amounts of 10 to 20 mg daily, for example 1 tablet or capsule once a day.
  • azosemide analogs according to the present invention may be administered in an amount of 60 mg per day.
  • torsemide analogs according to the present invention may be administered in amounts of 10 to 20 mg daily, for example 1 tablet or capsule once a day. It should be noted that lower doses may be administered, particularly for IV administration.
  • Methods and systems of the present invention may also be used to evaluate candidate compounds and treatment regimen for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of neuropathic pain and neuropsychiatric disorders.
  • Various techniques for generating candidate compounds potentially having the desired NKCCl cotransporter antagonist activity may be employed.
  • Candidate compounds may be generated using procedures well known to those skilled in the art of synthetic organic chemistry. Structure-activity relationships and molecular modeling techniques are useful for the purpose of modifying known NKCCl antagonists, such furosemide, bumetanide, ethacrinic acid and related compounds, to confer the desired activities and specificities.
  • Methods for screening candidate compounds for desired activities are described in U.S. Patents 5,902,732, 5,976,825, 6,096,510 and 6,319,682, which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
  • Candidate compounds may be screened for NKCCl antagonist activity using screening methods of the present invention with various types of cells in culture such as glial cells, neuronal cells, renal cells, and the like, or in situ in animal models. Screening techniques to identify chloride cotransporter antagonist activity, for example, may involve altering the ionic balance of the extracellular space in the tissue culture sample, or in situ in an animal model, by producing a higher than "normal" anionic chloride concentration. The geometrical and/or optical properties of the cell or tissue sample subject to this altered ionic balance are determined, and candidate agents are administered.
  • the corresponding geometrical and/or optical properties of the cell or tissue sample are monitored to determine whether the ionic imbalance remains, or whether the cells responded by altering the ionic balances in the extracellular and intracellular space. If the ionic imbalance remains, the candidate agent is likely a chloride cotransporter antagonist.
  • candidate compounds having a high level of glial cell chloride cotransporter antagonist activity and having a reduced level of neuronal cell and renal cell chloride cotransporter antagonist activity may be identified. Similarly, effects on different types of cells and tissue systems may be assessed.
  • the efficacy of candidate compounds may be assessed by simulating or inducing a condition, such as neuropathic pain, in situ in an animal model, monitoring the geometrical and/or optical properties of the cell or tissue sample during stimulation of the condition, administering the candidate compound, then monitoring the geometrical and/or optical properties of the cell or tissue sample following administration of the candidate compound, and comparing the geometrical and/or optical properties of the cell or tissue sample to determine the effect of the candidate compound.
  • a condition such as neuropathic pain
  • testing the efficacy of treatment compositions for relief of neuropathic pain can be carried using well known methods and animal models, such as that described in Bennett, Hosp. Pract. (Off Ed). 33:95-98, 1998.
  • compositions for use in the inventive methods may comprise a treatment agent selected from the group consisting of: antibodies, or antigen-binding fragments thereof, that specifically bind to NKCCl ; soluble ligands that bind to NKCCl ; anti-sense oligonucleotides to NKCCl ; and small interfering RNA molecules (siRNA or RNAi) that are specific for NKCCl.
  • a treatment agent selected from the group consisting of: antibodies, or antigen-binding fragments thereof, that specifically bind to NKCCl ; soluble ligands that bind to NKCCl ; anti-sense oligonucleotides to NKCCl ; and small interfering RNA molecules (siRNA or RNAi) that are specific for NKCCl.
  • Antibodies that specifically bind to NKCCl are known in the art and include those available from Alpha Diagnostic International, Inc. (San Antonio, TX 78238).
  • An "antigen-binding site,” or “antigen-binding fragment” of an antibody refers to the part of the antibody that participates in antigen binding.
  • the antigen binding site is formed by amino acid residues of the N-terminal variable ("V") regions of the heavy ("H") and light (“L”) chains.
  • V N-terminal variable
  • H heavy
  • L light chains.
  • Three highly divergent stretches within the V regions of the heavy and light chains are referred to as "hypervariable regions" which are interposed between more conserved flanking stretches known as "framework regions,” or "FRs”.
  • FR refers to amino acid sequences which are naturally found between and adjacent to hypervariable regions in immunoglobulins.
  • the three hypervariable regions of a light chain and the three hypervariable regions of a heavy chain are disposed relative to each other in three dimensional space to form an antigen- binding surface.
  • the antigen-binding surface is complementary to the three-dimensional surface of a bound antigen, and the three hypervariable regions of each of the heavy and light chains are referred to as "complementarity-determining regions," or "CDRs.”
  • CDRs complementarity-determining regions
  • the proteolytic enzyme papain preferentially cleaves IgG molecules to yield several fragments, two of which (the "F(ab)" fragments) each comprise a covalent heterodimer that includes an intact antigen-binding site.
  • the enzyme pepsin is able to cleave IgG molecules to provide several fragments, including the "F(ab') 2 " fragment, which comprises both antigen-binding sites.
  • An "Fv" fragment can be produced by preferential proteolytic cleavage of an IgM, IgG or IgA immunoglobulin molecule, but are more commonly derived using recombinant techniques known in the art.
  • the Fv fragment includes a non-covalent V H :: V L heterodimer including an antigen-binding site which retains much of the antigen recognition and binding capabilities of the native antibody molecule (Inbar et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL USA 69:2659-2662, 1972; Hochman et al. Biochem 75:2706-2710, 1976; and Ehrlich et al. Biochem 79:4091-4096, 1980).
  • Humanized antibodies that specifically bind to NKCCl may also be employed in the inventive methods.
  • a number of humanized antibody molecules comprising an antigen-binding site derived from a non-human immunoglobulin have been described, including chimeric antibodies having rodent V regions and their associated CDRs fused to human constant domains (Winter et al. Nature 349:293-299, 1991 ; Lobuglio et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 8(5:4220-4224, 1989; Shaw et al. J Immunol. /58:4534-4538, 1987; and Brown et al. Cancer Res.
  • Modulating the activity of NKCCl may alternatively be accomplished by reducing or inhibiting expression of the polypeptide, which can be achieved by interfering with transcription and/or translation of the corresponding polynucleotide.
  • Polypeptide expression may be inhibited, for example, by introducing anti-sense expression vectors, anti-sense oligodeoxyribonucleotides, anti-sense phosphorothioate oligodeoxy- ribonucleotides, anti-sense oligoribonucleotides or anti-sense phosphorothioate oligoribonucleotides; or by other means well known in the art. All such anti-sense polynucleotides are referred to collectively herein as "anti-sense oligonucleotides”.
  • the anti-sense oligonucleotides for use in the inventive methods are sufficiently complementary to the NKCCl polynucleotide to bind specifically to the polynucleotide.
  • the sequence of an anti-sense oligonucleotide need not be 100% complementary to the of the polynucleotide in order for the anti-sense oligonucleotide to be effective in the inventive methods.
  • an anti-sense oligonucleotide is sufficiently complementary when binding of the anti-sense oligonucleotide to the polynucleotide interferes with the normal function of the polynucleotide to cause a loss of utility, and when non-specific binding of the oligonucleotide to other, non-target sequences is avoided.
  • the design of appropriate anti-sense oligonucleotides is well known in the art. Oligonucleotides that are complementary to the 5' end of the message, for example the 5' untranslated sequence up to and including the AUG initiation codon, should work most efficiently at inhibiting translation.
  • oligonucleotides complementary to either the 5'- or 3'-non- translated, non-coding, regions of the targeted polynucleotide may also be employed.
  • Cell permeation and activity of anti-sense oligonucleotides can be enhanced by appropriate chemical modifications, such as the use of phenoxazine-substituted C-5 propynyl uracil oligonucleotides (Flanagan et al., Nat. Biotechnol. 17:48-52, 1999) or T- O-(2-methoxy) ethyl (2'-MOE)-oligonucleotides (Zhang et al, Nat. Biotechnol. 18:862- 867, 2000).
  • RNA interference RNA interference
  • RNAi RNA interference
  • traditional methods of gene suppression employing anti-sense RNA or DNA, operate by binding to the reverse sequence of a gene of interest such that binding interferes with subsequent cellular processes and therefore blocks synthesis of the corresponding protein.
  • RNAi also operates on a post-translational level and is sequence specific, but suppresses gene expression far more efficiently. Exemplary methods for controlling or modifying gene expression are provided in WO 99/49029, WO 99/53050 and WO01/75164, the disclosures of which are hereby incorporated by reference.
  • RNAi specifically bind to and cleave double-stranded RNA into short fragments.
  • the ribonuclease(s) remains associated with these fragments, which in turn specifically bind to complementary mRNA, i.e. specifically bind to the transcribed mRNA strand for the gene of interest.
  • the mRNA for the gene is also degraded- by the ribonuclease(s) into short fragments, thereby obviating translation and expression of the gene.
  • an RNA- polymerase may act to facilitate the synthesis of numerous copies of the short fragments,, which exponentially increases the efficiency of the system.
  • silencing is not limited to the cells where it is initiated. The gene-silencing effects may be disseminated to other parts of an organism.
  • the NKCCl polynucleotide may thus be employed to generate gene silencing constructs and/or gene-specific self-complementary, double-stranded RNA sequences that can be employed in the inventive methods using delivery methods known in the art.
  • a gene construct may be employed to express the self-complementary RNA sequences.
  • cells may be contacted with gene-specific double-stranded RNA molecules, such that the RNA molecules are internalized into the cell cytoplasm to exert a gene silencing effect.
  • the double-stranded RNA must have sufficient homology to the NKCCl gene to mediate RNAi without affecting expression of non-target genes.
  • the double-stranded DNA is at least 20 nucleotides in length, and is preferably 21 -23 nucleotides in length.
  • the double-stranded RNA corresponds specifically to a polynucleotide of the present invention.
  • siRNA small interfering RNA
  • RNAi technique employs genetic constructs within which sense and anti- sense sequences are placed in regions flanking an intron sequence in proper splicing orientation with donor and acceptor splicing sites. Alternatively, spacer sequences of various lengths may be employed to separate self-complementary regions of sequence in the construct.
  • intron sequences are spliced-out, allowing sense and anti-sense sequences, as well as splice junction sequences, to bind forming double-stranded RNA.
  • Select ribonucleases then bind to and cleave the double-stranded RNA, thereby initiating the cascade of events leading to degradation of specific mRNA gene sequences, and silencing specific genes.
  • a genetic construct, anti-sense oligonucleotide or RNA molecule may be administered by various art-recognized procedures (see, e.g., Rolland, Crit. Rev. Therap. Drug Carrier Systems /5: 143-198, 1998, and cited references). Both viral and non-viral delivery methods have been used for gene therapy.
  • Useful viral vectors include, for example, adenovirus, adeno-associated virus (AAV), retrovirus, vaccinia virus and avian poxvirus.
  • Improvements have been made in the efficiency of targeting genes to tumor cells with adenoviral vectors, for example, by coupling adenovirus to DNA- polylysine complexes and by strategies that exploit receptor-mediated endocytosis for selective targeting (see, e.g., Curiel et al., Hum. Gene Ther., 3: 147-154, 1992; and Cristiano & Curiel, Cancer Gene Ther. 3:49-57, 1996).
  • Non-viral methods for delivering polynucleotides are reviewed in Chang & Seymour, (Eds) Curr. Opin. MoI. Ther., vol. 2, 2000.
  • Liposomes can be modified by incorporation of ligands that recognize cell-surface receptors and allow targeting to specific receptors for uptake by receptor-mediated endocytosis (see, for example, Xu et al., MoI. Genet. Metab., 64: 193- 197; 1998; and Xu et al., Hum. Gene Ther., 10:2941 -2952, 1999).
  • Tumor-targeting bacteria such as Salmonella
  • Bacteria can be engineered ex vivo to penetrate and to deliver DNA with high efficiency into, for example, mammalian epithelial cells in vivo (see, e.g., Grillot- Courvalin et al., Nat. Biotechnol. 7(5:862-866, 1998).
  • Degradation-stabilized oligonucleotides may be encapsulated into liposomes and delivered to patients by injection either intravenously or directly into a target site (for example, the origin of neuropathic pain).
  • retroviral or adenoviral vectors, or naked DNA expressing anti-sense RNA for the inventive polypeptides may be administered to patients. Suitable techniques for use in such methods are well known in the art.
  • Bumetanide (1.2g, 3.29mmol) was dissolved in dimethylformamide (DMF, 12mL) and 4-(2-chloroethyl)morpholine hydrochloride (675mg, 3.62mmol) was added followed by triethylamine (ImL) and sodium iodide (500mg 3.33mmol).
  • DMF dimethylformamide
  • ImL triethylamine
  • sodium iodide 500mg 3.33mmol.
  • the reaction was heated to 95°C for 8 hours, at which time TLC and LC/MS indicated the reaction was complete.
  • the reaction was cooled to room temperature brought up in dichloromethane and washed with water, saturated ammonium chloride and concentrated to dryness.
  • bumetanide in a similar manner to Example 31 , bumetanide can be reacted with 3- (dimethylamino)propyl chloride hydrochloride, triethylamine and sodium iodide in dimethylformamide (DMF) to yield 3-(N,N-dimethylaminopropyl) 3-aminosulfonyl-5- butylamino-4-phenoxybenzoate.
  • DMF dimethylformamide
  • Bumetanide (1.16g, 3.2mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (1OmL) and 1- ethyl-3-(3-dimethylarninopropyl)carbodiimide (EDC, 690mg, 3.6mmol) was added. After 5 minutes N-hydroxybenzotriazole (HOBt, 498mg, 3.6mmol) was added and the solution was stirred for an additional 5 minutes. Diethylamine (332uL, 3.2mmol) was added and the reaction was stirred for 2 hours. The reaction was washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate, water and brine, and dried with magnesium sulfate. The dichloromethane was removed under reduced pressure to yield 860mg (65%) of pure N,N-diethyl 3-aminosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4-phenoxybenzamide.
  • EDC 1- ethyl-3-(3-dimethylarninopropyl)carbodiimide
  • bumetanide in a similar manner to Example 9, bumetanide can be reacted with cetyltrimethylammonium hydroxide in water to yield cetyltrimethylammonium 3- aminosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4-phenoxybenzoate.
  • Bumetanide (1.2g, 3.29mmol) was dissolved in dimethylformamide (DMF, 1OmL) and chloromethyl pivalate (575uL, 3.9mmol) was added followed by triethylamine (0.7OmL) and sodium iodide (545mg, 3.6mmol). The reaction was heated to 50 0 C for 10 hours, at which time TLC and LC/MS indicated the reaction was complete. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate and washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate, water and brine, and dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate.
  • bumetanide can be reacted with chloromethyl propionate, triethylamine and sodium iodide in dimethylformamide (DMF) to yield ethylcarbonyloxymethyl 3-aminosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4-phenoxybenzoate.
  • DMF dimethylformamide
  • piretanide in a similar manner to Example 1 , can be reacted with thionyl chloride and methanol to yield methyl 3-aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l -pyrrolidinyl)benzoate.
  • piretanide can be reacted with benzyl chloride in DMF to yield benzyl 3-aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l -pyrrolidinyl)benzoate.
  • piretanide in a similar manner to Example 31 , can be reacted with 3- (dimethylamino)propyl chloride hydrochloride, triethylamine and sodium iodide in dimethylformamide (DMF) to yield 3-(N,N-dimethylaminopropyl 3-aminosulfonyl-4- phenoxy-5-(l -pyrrolidinyl)benzoate.
  • DMF dimethylformamide
  • piretanide in a similar manner to Example 6, piretanide can be reacted with 2-chloro-N,N- diethylacetamide, triethylamine and sodium iodide in dimethylformamide (DMF) to yield N,N-diethylaminocarbony lmethyl 3-aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)- benzoate.
  • DMF dimethylformamide
  • piretanide in a similar manner to Example 7, piretanide can be reacted with EDC, HOBt and diethylamine in DMF to yield N,N-diethyl 3-aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l- pyrrolidinyl)-benzamide.
  • N,N-Dibenzyl 3-Aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l-pyrrolidinvDbenzoate (Piretanide Dibenzylamide)
  • piretanide can be reacted with EDC, HOBt and dibenzylamine in DMF to yield N,N-dibenzyl 3-aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l- pyrrolidinyl) benzamide.
  • piretanide can be reacted with benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide to yield benzyltrimethylammonium 3- aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)benzoate.
  • piretanide in a similar manner to Example 10, can be reacted with cetyltrimethylammonium hydroxide in water to yield cetyltrimethylammonium 3- aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l-pyrrolidinyl)benzoate.
  • piretanide in a similar manner to Example 1 1, piretanide can be reacted with 2-chloro-N,N dimethylacetamide, triethylamine and sodium iodide in DMF to yield N 5 N- dimethylaminocarbonylmethyl 3-aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)benzoate.
  • piretanide can be reacted with chloromethyl pivalate, triethylamine and sodium iodide in DMF to yieldj-butylcarbonyloxymethyl 3- aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)benzoate.
  • piretanide can be reacted with chloromethyl propionate, triethylamine and sodium iodide in DMF to yield ethylcarbonyloxymethyl 3- aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)benzoate.
  • Pharmaceutics 1988, 42, 217-224, can be employed to prepare ethyl 5-aminosulfonyl-4- chloro-2-[(2-furanylmethyl)amino]benzoate, m.p. 163 - 165°.
  • furosemide can be reacted with benzyl chloride in DMF to yield benzyl 5-aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2-furanylmethyl)amino]benzoate.
  • Pharmaceutics 1990, 60, 163-169, can be employed to prepare 2-(4-morpholino)ethyl 5- aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2-furanylmethyl)amino]benzoate, m.p. 134 - 135°.
  • furosemide in a similar manner to Example 7, furosemide can be reacted with EDC, HOBt and diethylamine in DMF to yield N,N-diethyl 5-aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2- furany lmethy l)-amino]benzamide.
  • furosemide can be reacted with benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide to yield benzyltrimethylammonium 5- aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2-furanylmethyl)amino]benzoate.
  • furosemide can be reacted with cetyltrimethylammonium hydroxide in water to yield cetyltrimethylammonium 5- aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2-furanylmethyl)amino]benzoate.
  • Pharmaceutics 1990, 60, 163-169, can be employed to prepare ethylcarbonyloxymethyl 5-aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2-furanylmethyl)amino]benzoate, m.p. 141 - 142°.
  • azosemide can be reacted with chloromethyl pivalate, triethylamine and sodium iodide in DMF to yield 5-[l-(t- Butylcarbonyloxymethyl)-lH-tetrazol-5-yl]-2-chloro ⁇ 4-[(2- thienylmethyl)amino]benzenesulfonamide.
  • Azosemide can be reacted with formaldehyde in methylene chloride, methylene chloride-DMF mixtures or DMF to yield 2-chloro-5-[l-(hydroxymethyl)-lH-tetrazol-5- yl]-4-[(2-thienylmethyl)amino]benzenesulfonamide.
  • Azosemide can be reacted with formaldehyde and methanol in methylene chloride, methylene chloride-DMF mixtures or DMF to yield 2-chloro-5-[l- (methoxymethyl)- 1 H-tetrazol-5-yl]-4-[(2-thienylmethyl)amino]benzenesulfonamide.
  • Azosemide can be reacted with formaldehyde and methanethiol in methylene chloride, methylene chloride-DMF mixtures or DMF to yield 2-chloro-5-[l- (methylthiomethyl)-lH-tetrazol-5-yl]-4-[(2-thienylmethyl)amino]benzenesulfonamide.
  • Azosemide can be reacted with benzyl chloromethyl ether, triethylamine and sodium iodide in DMF to yield 5-[l -(benzyloxymethyl)-lH-tetrazol-5-yl]- 2-chloro-4-[(2- thienylmethyl)amino]benzenesulfonamide.
  • azosemide can be reacted with benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide in water to yield the benzyltrimethylammonium salt of 2-chloro-5-(lH-tetrazol-5-yl)-4-[(2-thienylmethyl)amino]benzenesulfonamide.
  • azosemide can be reacted with cetyltrimethylammonium hydroxide in water to yield the cetyltrimethylammonium salt of 2-chloro-5-(lH-tetrazol-5-yl)-4-[(2-thienylmethyl)amino]benzenesulfonamide.
  • Butylcarbonyloxymethochloride (Pyridinium-Substituted Torsemide Salt)
  • torsemide can be reacted with chloromethyl pivalate, triethylamine and sodium iodide in DMF to yield 3- isopropylcarbamylsulfonamido-4-(3 ' -methylpheny l)aminopyridinium t- butylcarbonyloxymethochloride and some 3-isopropylcarbamylsulfonamido-4-(3'- methylphenyl)aminopyridinium t-butylcarbonyloxy-methoiodide.
  • Ethylcarbonyloxymethochloride (Pyridinium-Substituted Torsemide Salt)
  • torsemide can be reacted with chloromethyl propionate, triethylamine and sodium iodide in DMF to yield 3- isopropylcarbamylsulfonamido-4-(3'-methylphenyl)arninopyridinium ethylcarbonyloxymethochloride and some 3-isopropylcarbamylsulfonamido-4-(3'-methylphenyl)- aminopyridinium ethylcarbonyloxymethoiodide.
  • torsemide can be reacted with methyl chloromethyl ether and triethylamine and in DMF to yield 3- isopropylcarbamylsulfonamido-4-(3 ' -methylpheny l)aminopyridinium methoxymethochloride.
  • torsemide can be reacted with benzyl chloride and triethylamine in DMF to yield 3-isopropylcarbamylsulfbnamido-4-(3'- methylphenyl)-aminopyridinium phenylmethochloride.
  • Benzylthiomethochloride (Pyridinium-Substituted Torsemide Salt)
  • torsemide can be reacted with benzyl chloromethyl thioether and triethylamine in DMF to yield 3- isopropylcarbamylsulfonamido-4-(3'-methylphenyl)aminopyridinium benzylthiamethochloride.
  • torsemide can be reacted with methyl chloromethyl thioether and triethylamine and in DMF to yield 3- isopropylcarbamylsulfonamido-4-(3'-methylphenyl)aminopyridinium methylthiametho- chloride.
  • bumetanide can be reacted with MeO-PEG350- Cl (Biolink Life Sciences, Inc., Cary, NC, BLS-106-350) and triethylamine in DMF to yield methoxy(polyethyleneoxy) ⁇ - ⁇ -ethyl 3-aminosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4- phenoxybenzoate where n is in the 7-8 range.
  • MeO-PEG350- Cl Biolink Life Sciences, Inc., Cary, NC, BLS-106-350
  • bumetanide in a manner similar to Example 3, bumetanide can be reacted with MeO- PEGIOOO-OTs (Biolink Life Sciences, Inc., Cary, NC, BLS-107-1000) and triethylamine in DMF to yield methoxy(polyethyleneoxy) n- i -ethyl 3-aminosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4- phenoxybenzoate where n is in the 19-24 range.
  • MeO- PEGIOOO-OTs Biolink Life Sciences, Inc., Cary, NC, BLS-107-1000
  • piretanide can be reacted with MeO-PEG350-Cl (Biolink Life Sciences, Inc., Cary, NC, BLS-106-350) and triethylamine in DMF to yield methoxy(polyethyleneoxy) n -i -ethyl 3-aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l-pyrrolidinyl)- benzoate where n is in the 7-8 range.
  • MeO-PEG350-Cl Biolink Life Sciences, Inc., Cary, NC, BLS-106-350
  • triethylamine in DMF
  • piretanide can be reacted with MeO-PEGlOOO- OTs (Biolink Life Sciences, Inc., Cary, NC, BLS-107-1000) and triethylamine in DMF to yield methoxy(polyethyleneoxy) n - ⁇ -ethyl 3-aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l-pyrrolidinyl)- benzoate where n is in the 19-24 range.
  • MeO-PEGlOOO- OTs Biolink Life Sciences, Inc., Cary, NC, BLS-107-1000
  • furosemide can be reacted with MeO-P EG350-Cl (Biolink Life Sciences, Inc., Cary, NC, BLS-106-350) and triethylamine in DMF to yield methoxy(polyethyleneoxy) n -i -ethyl 5-aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2-furanylmethyl)- amino]-benzoate where n is in the 7-8 range.
  • azosemide can be reacted with MeO-PEGlOOO- OTs (Biolink Life Sciences, Inc., Cary, NC, BLS- 107- 1000) and triethylamine in DMF to yield 5-[l -[methoxy(polyethyleneoxy) n .i-ethyl]-lH-tetrazol-5-yl]-2-chloro-4-[(2- thienylmethyl)-amino]benzenesulfonamides where n is in the 19-24 range.
  • torsemide can be reacted with MeO-PEG350-Cl (Biolink Life Sciences, Inc., Cary, NC, BLS- 106-350) and triethylamine in DMF to yield 3-isopropylcarbamylsulfonamido-4-(3'-methylphenyl)aminopyridinium methoxy(polyethyleneoxy) n- i-ethochlorides where n is in the 7-8 range.
  • MeO-PEG350-Cl Biolink Life Sciences, Inc., Cary, NC, BLS- 106-350
  • torsemide can be reacted with MeO-PEGlOOO- OTs (Biolink Life Sciences, Inc., Cary, NC, BLS- 107- 1000) and triethylamine in DMF to yield 3-isopropylcarbamylsulfonamido-4-(3 '-methylphenyl)aminopyridinium methoxy- (polyethyleneoxy)n-i-ethochlorides where n is in the 19-24 range.
  • MeO-PEGlOOO- OTs Biolink Life Sciences, Inc., Cary, NC, BLS- 107- 1000
  • piretanide can be reacted with bis(4-methylpiperazinyl)aluminum hydride to yield 3-aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l-pyrrolidinyl)benzaldehyde.
  • furosemide can be reacted with bis(4-methylpiperazinyl)aluminum hydride to yield 5-aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2-furanylmethyl)amino]benzaldehyde.
  • the slicing medium was a sucrose-based artificial cerebrospinal fluid (sACSF) consisting of 220 mM sucrose, 3 mM KCI, 1.25 mM NaH 2 PO 4 , 2 mM MgSO 4 , 26 mM NaHCO 3 , 2 mM CaCl 2 , and 10 mM dextrose (295-305 mOsm).
  • sACSF sucrose-based artificial cerebrospinal fluid
  • a hemisphere of brain containing hippocampus was blocked and glued (cyanoacrylic adhesive) to the stage of a Vibroslicer (Frederick Haer, Brunsick, ME). Horizontal or transverse slices 400 ⁇ m thick were cut in 4° C, oxygenated (95% O 2 ; 5% CO 2 ) slicing medium.
  • the slices were immediately transferred to a holding chamber where they remained submerged in oxygenated bathing medium (ACSF) consisting of 124 mM NaCl, 3 mM KCl, 1.25 mM NaH 2 PO 4 , 2 mM MgSO 4 , 26 mM NaHCO 3 , 2 mM CaCl 2 , and 10 mM dextrose (295-305 mOsm).
  • ACSF oxygenated bathing medium
  • the slices were held at room temperature for at least 45 minutes before being transferred to a submersion-style recording chamber (all other experiments). In the recording chamber, the slices were perfused with oxygenated recording medium at 34-35° C. All animal procedures were conducted in accordance with NIH and University of Washington animal care guidelines.
  • Spontaneous interictal-like bursts were observed in slices treated by the following modifications or additions to the bathing medium: 10 mM potassium (6 slices; 4 animals; average - 81 bursts/min.); 200-300 ⁇ M 4-aminopyridine (4 slices; 2 animals; average - 33 burst/min.); 50-100 ⁇ M bicuculline (4 slices; 3 animals; average - 14 bursts/min); M Mg ++ (1 hour of perfusion - 3 slices; 2 animals; average - 20 bursts/min. or 3 hours of perfusion - 2 slices; 2 animals); zero calcium/6 mM KCI and 2 mM EGTA (4 slices; 3 animals). In all treatments, furosemide was added to the recording medium once a consistent level of bursting was established.
  • the tissue was placed in a perfusion chamber located on the stage of an upright microscope and illuminated with a beam of white light (tungsten filament light and lens system; Dedo Inc.) directed through the microscope condenser.
  • the light was controlled and regulated (power supply - Lamda Inc.) to minimize fluctuations and filtered (695 nm longpass) so that the slice was transilluminated with long wavelengths (red).
  • Field of view and magnification were determined by the choice of microscope objectives (4X for monitoring the entire slice).
  • Image-frames were acquired with a charge-coupled device (CCD) camera (Dage MTI Inc.) at 30 HZ and were digitized at 8 bits with a spatial resolution of 512 x 480 pixels using an Imaging Technology Inc.
  • CCD charge-coupled device
  • Noise was defined as the maximum standard deviation of fluctuations of AR/R of the sequence of control images within a given acquisition series, where AR/R represented the magnitude of the change in light-transmission through the tissue.
  • Delta R/R was calculated by taking all the difference-images and dividing by the first control image: (subsequent image - first-control-image)/first-control-image. The noise was always ⁇ 0.01 for each of the chosen image sequences.
  • the absolute change in light transmission through the tissue was estimated during some experiments by acquiring images after placing neutral density filters between the camera and the light source. On average, the camera electronics and imaging system electronics amplified the signal 10- fold prior to digitization so that the peak absolute changes in light transmission through the tissue were usually between 1 % and 2%.
  • Fig. ID is a video image of a typical hippocampal slice in the recording chamber.
  • the fine gold-wire mesh that was used to hold the tissue in place can be seen as dark lines running diagonally across the slice.
  • a stimulating electrode can be seen in the upper right on the stratum radiatum of CAl .
  • the recording electrode (too thin to be seen in the photo) was inserted at the point indicated by the white arrow.
  • Fig. IA illustrates that two seconds of stimulation at 60 Hz elicited after discharge activity and shows a typical after discharge episode recorded by the extracellular electrode.
  • the inset of Fig. IA shows the CAl field response to a single 200 sec test pulse (artifact at arrow) delivered to the Schaffer collaterals.
  • IAl shows a map of the peak change in optical transmission through the tissue evoked by Schaffer collateral stimulation.
  • the region of maximum optical change corresponds to the apical and basal dendritic regions of CAl on either side of the stimulating electrode.
  • Fig. IB illustrates sample traces showing responses to stimulation after 20 minutes of perfusion with medium containing 2.5 mM furosemide. Both the electrical after discharge activity (shown in Fig. IB) and the stimulation-evoked optical changes (shown in Fig. IBl) were blocked. However, there was a hyper-excitable field response (multiple population spikes) to the test pulse (inset).
  • Figs 1C and ICl illustrate that restoration of initial response patterns was seen after 45 minutes of perfusion with normal bathing medium.
  • EXAMPLE 69 The effects of furosemide on epileptiform discharges in hippocampal slices perfused with high-K "1" (10 mM) bathing medium Rat hippocampal slices, prepared as described above, were perfused with a high- K + solution until extended periods of spontaneous interictal-like bursting were recorded simultaneously in C A3 (top traces) and CAl (lower traces) pyramidal cell regions (Figs. 2A and 2B). After 15 minutes of perfusion with furosemide-containing medium (2.5 mM furosemide), the burst discharges increased in magnitude (Figs. 2C and 2D).
  • furosemide blocks a component of the inhibitory currents in hippocampal slices with a latency ( ⁇ 15 min.) similar to the time to onset of the increased excitability observed here.
  • the longer latency required for the furosemide-block of the spontaneous bursting might correspond to additional time required for a sufficient block of the furosemide-sensitive cellular volume regulation mechanisms under high-K + conditions.
  • This example illustrates an in vivo model in which epileptiform activity was induced by i.v. injection of kainic acid (KA) into anesthetized rats (Lothman et al., Neurology 31 :806, 1981 ).
  • the results are illustrated in Figs. 3A - 3H.
  • Sprague-Dawley rats (4 animals; weights 250-270 g) were anesthetized with urethane (1.25 g/kg i.p.) and anesthesia maintained by additional urethane injections (0.25 g/kg i.p.) as needed.
  • Body temperature was monitored using a rectal temperature probe and maintained at 35-37° C with a heating pad; heart rate (EKG) was continuously monitored.
  • the jugular vein was cannulated on one side for intravenous drug administration. Rats were placed in a Kopf stereotaxic device (with the top of the skull level), and a bipolar stainless-steel microelectrode insulated to 0.5 mm of the tip was inserted to a depth of 0.5-1.2 mm from the cortical surface to record electroencephalographic (EEG) activity in the fronto-parietal cortex. In some experiments, a 2M NaCl-containing pipette was lowered to a depth of 2.5-3.0 mm to record hippocampal EEG. Data were stored on VHS videotape and analyzed off-line.
  • EEG electroencephalographic
  • Figs. 3A-3H show furosemide blockade of kainic acid-evoked electrical "status epilepticus" in urethane-anesthetized rats. EKG recordings are shown as the top traces and EEG recordings are shown as the bottom traces. In this model, intense electrical discharge (electrical "status epilepticus") was recorded from the cortex (or from depth hippocampal electrodes) 30-60 minutes after KA injection (10-12 mg/kg) (Figs. 3C and 3D). Control experiments (and previous reports, Lothman et al., Neurology, 31 :806, 1981) showed that this status-like activity was maintained for well over 3 hours.
  • Hippocampal slices were prepared from Sprague-Dawley adult rats as described previously. Transverse hippocampal slices 100 ⁇ m thick were cut with a vibrating cutter. Slices typically contained the entire hippocampus and subiculum. After cutting, slices were stored in an oxygenated holding chamber at room temperature for at least one hour before recording. All recordings were acquired in an interface type chamber with oxygenated (95% O 2 , 5%CO 2 ) artificial cerebral spinal fluid (ACSF) at 34°-35°C. Normal ACSF contained (in mmol/1): 124 NaCl, 3 KCl, 1.25 NaH 2 PO 4 , 1.2 MgSO 4 , 26 NaHCO 3 , 2 CaCl 2 , and 10 dexrrose.
  • Sharp-electrodes for intracellular recordings from CAl and C A3 pyramidal cells were filled with 4 M potassium acetate.
  • Field recordings from the CA l and CA3 cell body layers were acquired with low-resistance glass electrodes filled with 2 M NaCl.
  • a small monopolar tungsten electrode was placed on the surface of the slice.
  • Spontaneous and stimulation-evoked activities from field and intracellular recordings were digitized (Neurocorder, Neurodata Instruments, New York, NY) and stored on videotape.
  • AxoScope software (Axon Instruments) on a personal computer was used for off-line analysis of data.
  • normal or low-chloride medium was used containing bicuculline (20 ⁇ M), 4-amino pyridine (4-AP) (100 ⁇ M), or high-K r (7.5 or 12 raM).
  • low-chloride solutions (7, and 21 niM [Cl " ]o) were prepared by equimolar replacement of NaCI with Na + -gluconate (Sigma). All solutions were prepared so that they had a pH of approximately 7.4 and an osmolality of 290-300 mOsm at 35°C and at equilibrium from carboxygenation with 95 0 X)O 2 / 5%CO 2 .
  • EXAMPLE 71 Timing of cessation of spontaneous epileptiform bursting in areas in CAl and CA3
  • the relative contributions of the factors that modulate synchronized activity vary between areas CA l and CA3. These factors include differences in the local circuitry' and region-specific differences in cell packing and volume fraction of the extracellular spaces. If the anti-epileptic effects of anion or chloride-cotransport antagonism are due to a desynchronization in the timing of neuronal discharge, chloride-cotransport blockade might be expected to differentially affect areas CAl and CA3. To test this, a series of experiments was performed to characterize differences in the timing of the blockade of spontaneous epileptiform activity in areas CAl and CA3.
  • Example 4 suggested a temporal relationship between the exposure time to low-[Cl " ]o or furosemide-containing medium and the characteristics of the spontaneous burst activity. Further, this relationship was different between areas CA l and CA3.
  • the bathing medium was switched to bicuculline-containing low-[Cl ' ]o (21 mM) medium. After approximately 20 minutes, the burst frequency and amplitude was at its greatest. Simultaneous field and intracellular recordings during this time showed that the CAl field and intracellular recordings were closely synchronized with the CA3 field discharges. During each spontaneous discharge, the CA3 field response preceded the CA 1 discharge by several milliseconds. During stimulation-evoked events, action potential discharges of the CAl pyramidal cell were closely synchronized to both CA3 and CAl field discharges.
  • CAl action potential discharge is due to the randomization of mechanisms necessary for synaptically-driven action potential generation, such as a disruption in the timing of synaptic release or random conduction failures at neuronal processes. If this were the case, then one would expect that the occurrence of action potentials between a given pair of neurons would vary randomly with respect to one another, from stimulation to stimulation. We tested this by comparing the patterns of action potential discharge of pairs of neurons between multiple consecutive stimuli of the Schaffer collaterals. During each stimulation event, the action potentials occurred at nearly identical times with respect to one another, and showed an almost identical burst morphology from stimulation to stimulation.
  • EXAMPLE 74 Effects of low-chloride treatment on spontaneous synaptic activity It is possible that the anti-epileptic effects associated with chloride-cotransport antagonism are mediated by some action on transmitter release. Blockade of chloride- cotransport could alter the amount or timing of transmitter released from terminals, thus affecting neuronal synchronization. To test whether low-[Cl " ]o exposure affected mechanisms associated with transmitter release, intracellular CAl responses were recorded simultaneously with CAl and CA3 field responses during a treatment which dramatically increases spontaneous synaptic release of transmitter from presynaptic terminals.
  • Sprague-Dawley adult rats were prepared as previously described. Briefly, transverse hippocampal slices, 400 ⁇ m thick, were cut using a vibrating cutter. Slices typically contained the entire hippocampus and subiculum. After cutting, slices were stored in an oxygenated holding chamber for at least one hour prior to recording. All recordings were acquired in an interface type chamber with oxygenated (95% O 2 /5% CO 2 ) artificial cerebral spinal fluid (ACSF) at 34°-35°C.
  • Normal ACSF contained (in mmol/1): 124 NaCl, 3 KCl, 1.25 NaH 2 PO 4 , 1.2 MgSO 4 , 26 NaHCO 3 , 2 CaCl 2 , and 10 dextrose.
  • normal or low-chloride medium was used containing bicuculline (20 ⁇ M), 4-AP (100 ⁇ M), or high-K + (12 ltiM).
  • Low-chloride solutions (7, 16, and 21 mM [Cl ⁇ ]o) were prepared by equimolar replacement of NaCl with Na + - gluccnate (Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO).
  • AU solutions were prepared so that they had a pH of approximately 7.4 and an osmolarity of 290-300 mOsm :it 35°C and at equilibrium from carboxygenution with 95% O 2 / 5% CO 2 .
  • Sharp-electrodes filled with 4 M potassium acetate were used for intracellular recordings from CAl pyramidal cells.
  • Field recordings from the CA l or C ⁇ 3 cell body layers were acquired with low-resistance glass electrodes filled with NaCl (2 M).
  • a small monopolar electrode wi'S placed on ,- the surface of the slice midw ay between areas CAl and CA3.
  • Spontaneous ;ind, stimulation-evoked activities from field and intracellular recordings were digitized i Neurocorder,- Neurodata Instruments,. New York, NY), and stored on video tape.
  • AxoScope software (Axon Instruments Inc.) on a PC-computer was used for off-line analyses of data.
  • Ion-selective microelectrodes were fabricated according to standard methods well known in Ihcavt. Double-barreled pipettes were pulled and broken to a- tip diameter of approximately 3.0 ⁇ m. The reference barrel was filled with ACSF and the other barrel was sylani/ed and the tip back-filled ⁇ vith a resin selective for K + (Corning 4773 17). The remainder of the sylanized barrel was tilled with KCl ( 140 mM). Each barrel was led, via Ag/AgCl wires, to a high impedance dual -differential amplifier (WPI FD223). Each ion- selective microelectrcde was calibrated by the use of solutions of known ionic composition and was considered suitable if it was characterized by a near- Mernstian slope response and if it remained stable throughout the duration of the experiment.
  • WPI FD223 high impedance dual -differential amplifier
  • the field and intracellular electrodes were always placed in close proximity to one another ( ⁇ 200 ⁇ m).
  • spontaneous bursting developed, first at the cellular level, and then in the field.
  • This spontaneous field activity representing synchronized burst discharge in a large population of neurons, lasted from 5 - 10 minutes, after which time the field recording became silent.
  • the field first became silent the cell continued to discharge spontaneously.
  • This result suggests that population activity has been "desynchronized" while the ability of individual cells to discharge has not been impaired.
  • intracellular recording showed that cells continued to discharge spontaneously even though the field remained silent.
  • the K. + -selective microelectrode and a field electrode were placed in the CAl pyramidal layer close to one another ( ⁇ 200 ⁇ m), and a stimulation pulse was delivered to the Schaffer collaterals every 20 seconds so that the magnitude of the population spike could be monitored.
  • Multiple spontaneously occurring negative field shifts were evoked by perfusion with low-[Cl " o] (7 mM) medium.
  • Each event was associated with a significant increase in [K + ]o, with the [K + ]o increase starting several seconds prior to the onset of negative field shift.
  • a slow 1.5-2.0 mM increase in [K + ]o occurred over a time interval of approximately 1-2 minute seconds prior to the onset of each event.
  • the stimulation-evoked field responses slowly increased in amplitude over time, along with the increasing [K + ]o, until just before the negative field shift.
  • Sprague-Dawley adult rats were prepared as previously described. Transverse hippocampal slices, 400 ⁇ m thick, were cut with a vibrating cuter and stored in an oxygenated holding chamber for 1 hour before recording. A submersion-type chamber was used for K + -selective microelectrode recordings. Slices were perfused with oxygenated (95% O 2 /5% CO 2 ) artificial cerebrospinal fluid (ACSF) at 34-35 0 C.
  • Normal ACSF contained 10 mM dextrose, 124 mM NaCl, 3 mM KCl, 1.25 mM NaH 2 PO 4 , 1.2 mM MgSO 4 , 26 mM NaHCO 3 and 2 mM CaCl 2 .
  • K + selective microelectrodes were fabricated according to standard methods. Briefly, the reference barrel of a double-barreled pipette was filled with ACSF, and the other barrel was sylanized and the tip back-filled with KCl with K + -selective resin (Corning 477317). Ion-selective microelectrodes were calibrated and considered suitable if they had a Nernstian slope response and remained stable throughout the duration of the experiment.
  • Exposure of hippocarcpal slices to low-[Cl-]o medium has been shown to include a temporally-dependent sequence of changes on the activity of CAl pyramidal cells, with three characteristics phases, as described above.
  • exposure to low-[Ci-]o medium results in a brief period of increased, hyperexcitability and spontaneous epileptiform discharge.
  • spontaneous epileptiform activity is blocked, but cellular hyperexcitability remains, - and action potential firing times, become less synchronized with one another.
  • the action potential fi> ing times become sufficiemly desy ⁇ chronized so that stimulaticn_-e ⁇ oked. fielcL.
  • K + -selective and field microelectrodes were placed in the CA ! cell body layer, and a stimulating electrode was placed on the Schaffer collateral pathway, and r.ingle-pulse stimuli (300 ⁇ s) were delivered every 20 seconds.
  • the perfusion was switched to !ow- [Cl " ]o medium.
  • the field responses became hyperexcitable as the [K + Jo began to rise.
  • the magnitude of the field response diminished until it was completely abolished.
  • EXAMPLE 81 Changes in extracellular pH during low-chloride exposure Antagonists of the anion/chlori de-dependent cotransporter, such as furosemide and low-[Cl-]o, may affect extracellular pH transients that might contribute to the maintenance of synchronized population activity.
  • Rat hippocampal brain slices were prepared as described in Example 80, except the NaHCO 3 was substituted by equimolar amount of HEPES (26 nM) and an interface-type chamber was used. In four hippocampal brain slices continuous spontaneous bursting was elicited by exposure to medium containing 100 ⁇ M 4-AP, as described in Example 13. Field recordings were acquired simultaneously from the cell body layers in areas CAl and CA3.
  • FIG. 4 illustrates a schematic model of ion cotransport under conditions of reduced [Cl " ].
  • Fig. 4A left panel, shows that the chloride gradient necessary for the generation of IPSPs in neurons is maintained by efflux of ions through a furosemide- sensitive K + ,C1 " cotransporter.
  • a high concentration of intracellular potassium (maintained by the 3Na + , 2K + -ATPase pump) serves as the driving force for the extrusion of Cl ' against its concentration gradient.
  • glial cells as shown in the right panel of Fig.
  • the movement of ions through the furosemide-sensitive NKCC co-transporter is from extracellular to intracellular spaces.
  • the ion-gradients necessary for this cotransport are maintained, in part, by the "transmembrane sodium cycle”: sodium ions taken into glial cells through NKCC cotransport are continuously extruded by the 3Na + ,2K ,-ATPase pump so that a low intracellular sodium concentration is maintained.
  • the rate and direction of ion-flux through the furosemide-dependent cotransporters are functionally proportional to their ion-product differences written as [K + ]; x [C ⁇ .
  • Figure 4B shows a schematic phenomenological model that explains the emergence of the late-occurrir.g spontaneous field events that arise as a result of prolonged low -[C! " ]o exposure.
  • the ion-product differences for neurons and glia as QN and QG, respectively.
  • the differences of the ion- products for neuronsi. are. such I hat IC + and Cl " are cotransported from intracellular to extracellular spaees (QN > 0); the differences in ion-products for glial cslLs are such that Na 4 . K " and Cl ' are cotransported from the ECS to intracellular compartments (QG ⁇ 0).
  • furosemide The ability of furosemide to alleviate pain will be examined in rodents using the Chung model of neuropathic pain (see, for example, Walker et al. MoI. Med. Today 5:319-321 , 1999). Sixteen adult male Long-Evans rats will be used in this study. All rats will receive spinal ligation of the L5 nerve as detailed below. Eight of the sixteen rats will receive an injection (intravenous) of furosemide and the remaining eight will receive intravenous injection of vehicle only. Pain threshold will be assessed immediately using the mechanical paw withdrawal test. Differences in pain thresholds between the two groups will be compared. If furosemide alleviates pain, the group with the furosemide treatment will exhibit a higher pain threshold than the group that received vehicle.
  • the chamber is positioned on top of a mesh screen so that mechanical stimuli can be administered to the plantar surface of both hindpaws.
  • Mechanical threshold measurements for each hindpaw are obtained using an up/down method with eight von Frey monofilaments (5, 7, 13, 26, 43, 64, 106, and 202 mN). Each trial begins with a von Frey force of 13 mN delivered to the right hindpaw for approximately 1 sec, and then the left hindpaw. If there is no withdrawal response, the next higher force is delivered. If there is a response, the next lower force is delivered. This procedure is performed until no response is made at the highest force (202 mN) or until four stimuli are administered following the initial response.
  • Contextual fear conditioning involves pairing an aversive event, in this case moderate foot shock, with a distinctive environment.
  • the strength of the fear memory is assessed using freezing, a species-typical defensive reaction in rats, marked by complete immobility, except for breathing. If rats are placed into a distinctive environment and are immediately shocked they do not learn to fear the context. However, if they are allowed to explore the distinctive environment sometime before the immediate shock, they show intense anxiety and fear when placed back into the same environment.
  • the experiment employed 24 rats. Each rat received a single 5 min episode of exploration of a small, novel environment. Seventy-two hours later they were placed into the same environment and immediately received two moderate foot-shocks (1 milliamp) separated by 53 sec. Twenty-four hours later, 8 of the rats received an injection (LV.) of furosemide (100 mg/kg) in vehicle (DMSO), and 8 of the rats were injected LV. with bumetanide (50 mg/kg) in vehicle (DMSO). The remaining 8 rats received an injection of DMSO alone. Each rat was again placed into the same environment for 8 min during which time freezing was measured, as an index of Pavlovian conditioned fear.
  • FPS fear potentiated startle
  • startle amplitudes were assessed during startle alone trials and startle plus fear (light followed by startle) trials.
  • Fear potentiated startle was compared between the treatment groups.
  • each rat was placed in a small Plexiglas cylinder.
  • the floor of each stabilimeter consisted of four 6-ram-diameter stainless steel bars spaced 18 mm apart through which shock can be delivered. Cylinder movements result in displacement of an accelerometer .where the resultant voltage is proportional to the velocity of the cage displacement. Startle amplitude is defined as the maximum accelerometer voltage that occurs during the first 0.25 sec after the startle stimulus is delivered.
  • the analog output of the accelerometer was amplified, digitized on a scale of CM1096 units and stored on a microcomputer.
  • Each stabilimeter was enclosed in a ventilated, light-, and sound- attenuating box.
  • the noise of a ventilating fan attached to a sidewall of each wooden box produced an overall background noise level of 64 dB.
  • the startle stimulus was a 50 ms burst of white noise (5 ms rise-decay time) generated by a white noise generator.
  • the visual conditioned stimulus employed was illumination of a light bulb adjacent to the white noise source.
  • the unconditioned stimulus was a 0.6 mA foot shock with duration of 0.5 sec, generated by four constant-current shockers located outside the chamber.
  • the presentation and sequencing of all stimuli were under the control of the microcomputer. FPS procedures consisted of 5 days of testing; during days 1 and 2 baseline startle responses were collected, days 3 and 4 light/shock pairings were delivered, day 5 testing for fear potentiated startle was conducted.
  • Rats were placed in the same startle boxes where they were trained and after 3 min were presented with 18 startle-eliciting stimuli (all at 105 dB). These initial startle stimuli were used to again habituate the rats to the acoustic startle stimuli. Thirty seconds after the last of these stimuli, each animal received 60 startle stimuli with half of the stimuli presented alone (startle alone trials) and the other half presented 3.2 sec after the onset of the 3.7 sec CS (CS-startle trials). All startle stimuli are presented at a mean 30 sec interstimulus interval, randomly varying between 20 and 40 sec. Measures: The treatment groups were compared on the difference in startle amplitude between CS-startle and startle-alone trials (fear potentiation).
  • Fig. 6 shows the baseline startle amplitudes for each group of rats determined prior to the test day.
  • Fig. 7 shows the amplitude of response on startle alone trials determined on the test day immediately following injection of either DMSO alone, bumetanide or furosemide, with Fig. 8 showing the difference score (startle alone - fear potentiated startle) on the test day.
  • a statistically significantly lower difference score was observed in rats treated with either furosemide or bumetanide than in rats treated with vehicle alone, indicating that both furosemide and bumetanide are effective in reducing anxiety.
  • Figs. 9 and 10 show the startle alone amplitude and the difference score, respectively, one week after treatment with either furosemide or bumetanide.
  • Fig. 1 1 shows the difference score (startle alone - fear potentiated startle) on the test day in rats treated with one of the following bumetanide analogs: bumetanide N,N- diethylglycolamide ester (referred to as 2MIK053); bumetanide methyl ester (referred to as 3MIK054); bumetanide N,N-dimethylglycolamide ester (referred to as 3MIK069-11); bumetanide morpholinodethyl ester (referred to as 3MIK066-4); bumetanide pivaxetil ester (referred to as 3MIK069-12); bumetanide cyanomethyl ester (referred to as 3MIK047); bumetanide dibenzylamide (referred to as 3MIK065); or bumetanide 3- (dimethylaminoproply) ester (referred to as 3MIK066-5).
  • the vehicle was DMSO.
  • SEQ ID NO: 1-2 are set out in the attached Sequence Listing.
  • the codes for polynucleotide and polypeptide sequences used in the attached Sequence Listing conform to WIPO Standard ST.25 (1988), Appendix 2.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Psychiatry (AREA)
  • Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
  • Acyclic And Carbocyclic Compounds In Medicinal Compositions (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Medicines Containing Plant Substances (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention relates to methods and compositions for treating neuropathic pain and neuropsychiatric disorders by administering agents that are effective in reducing the effective amount, inactivating, and/or inhibiting the activity of a Na+-K+-2Cl- (NKCC) cotransporter. In certain embodiments, the Na+-K+-2Cl- co-transporter is NKCCl.

Description

METHODS AND COMPOSITIONS FOR THE TREATMENT OF ANXIETY DISORDERS
Reference to Related Applications This application claims priority to: U.S. Patent Application No. 1 1/251,724 filed
October 17, 2005; U.S. Patent Application No. 1 1/130,945, filed May 17, 2005; and U.S. Patent Application No. 1 1/101,000, filed April 7, 2005.
Technical Field of the Invention The present invention relates to methods and compositions for treating selected conditions of the central and peripheral nervous systems employing non-synaptic mechanisms. More specifically, the present invention relates to methods and compositions for treating neuropsychiatric disorders by administering agents that modulate expression and/or activity of sodium-potassium-chloride co-transporters.
Background of the Invention
Neuropathic pain and nociceptive pain differ in their etiology, pathophysiology, diagnosis and treatment. Nociceptive pain occurs in response to the activation of a specific subset of peripheral sensory neurons, the nociceptors. It is generally acute (with the exception of arthritic pain), self-limiting and serves a protective biological function by acting as a warning of on-going tissue damage. It is typically well localized and often has an aching or throbbing quality. Examples of nociceptive pain include post-operative pain, sprains, bone fractures, burns, bumps, bruises, inflammation (from an infection or arthritic disorder), obstructions and myofascial pain. Nociceptive pain can usually be treated with opioids and non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDS).
Neuropathic pain is a common type of chronic, non-malignant, pain, which is the result of an injury or malfunction in the peripheral or central nervous system and serves no protective biological function. It is estimated to affect more than 1.6 million people in the U.S. population. Neuropathic pain has many different etiologies, and may occur, for example, due to trauma, diabetes, infection with herpes zoster (shingles), HIV/AIDS peripheral neuropathies, late-stage cancer, amputation (including mastectomy), carpal tunnel syndrome, chronic alcohol use, exposure to radiation, and as an unintended side- effect of neurotoxic treatment agents, such as certain anti-HIV and chemotherapeutic drugs.
In contrast to nociceptive pain, neuropathic pain is frequently described as "burning", "electric", "tingling" or "shooting" in nature. It is often characterized by chronic allodynia (defined as pain resulting from a stimulus that does not ordinarily elicit a painful response, such as light touch) and hyperalgesia (defined as an increased sensitivity to a normally painful stimulus), and may persist for months or years beyond the apparent healing of any damaged tissues.
Neuropathic pain is difficult to treat. Analgesic drugs that are effective against normal pain (e.g., opioid narcotics and non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs) are rarely effective against neuropathic pain. Similarly, drugs that have activity in neuropathic pain are not usually effective against nociceptive pain. The standard drugs that have been used to treat neuropathic pain appear to often act selectively to relieve certain symptoms but not others in a given patient (for example, relief of allodynia, but not hyperalgesia). For this reason, it has been suggested that successful therapy may require the use of multiple different combinations of drugs and individualized therapy (see, for example, Bennett, Hosp. Pract. (Off Ed). 33:95-98, 1998). Treatment agents typically employed in the management of neuropathic pain include tricylic antidepressants (for example, amitriptyline, imipramine, desimipramine and clomipramine), systemic local anesthetics, and anti-convulsants (such as phenytoin, carbamazepine, valproic acid, clonazepam and gabapentin).
Many anti-convulsants originally developed for the treatment of epilepsy and other seizure disorders have found application in the treatment of non-epileptic conditions, including neuropathic pain, mood disorders (such as bipolar affective disorder), and schizophrenia (for a review of the use of anti-epileptic drugs in the treatment of non-epileptic conditions, see Rogawski and Loscher, Nat. Medicine, 10:685- 692, 2004). It has thus been suggested that epilepsy, neuropathic pain and affective disorders have a common pathophysiological mechanism (Rogawski & Loscher, ibid; Ruscheweyh & Sandkuhler, Pain 105:327-338, 2003), namely a pathological increase in neuronal excitability, with a corresponding inappropriately high frequency of spontaneous firing of neurons. However, only some, and not all, antiepileptic drugs are effective in treating neuropathic pain, and furthermore such antiepileptic drugs are only effective in certain subsets of patients with neuropathic pain (McCleane, Expert. Opin. Pharmacother. 5: 1299-1312, 2004). Epilepsy is characterized by abnormal discharges of cerebral neurons and is typically manifested as various types of seizures. Epileptiform activity is identified with spontaneously occurring synchronized discharges of neuronal populations that can be measured using electrophysiological techniques. This synchronized activity, which distinguishes epileptiform from non-epileptiform activity, is referred to as "hypersynchronization" because it describes the state in which individual neurons become increasingly likely to discharge in a time-locked manner with one another. Hypersynchronized activity is typically induced in experimental models of epilepsy by either increasing excitatory or decreasing inhibitory synaptic currents, and it was therefore assumed that hyperexcitability per se was the defining feature involved in the generation and maintenance of epileptiform activity. Similarly, neuropathic pain was believed to involve conversion of neurons involved in pain transmission from a state of normal sensitivity to one of hypersensitivity (Costigan & Woolf, JnI. Pain 1 :35-44, 2000). The focus on developing treatments for both epilepsy and neuropathic pain has thus been on suppressing neuronal hyperexcitability by either: (a) suppressing action potential generation; (b) increasing inhibitory synaptic transmission; or (c) decreasing excitatory synaptic transmission. However, it has been shown that hypersychronous epileptiform activity can be dissociated from hyperexcitability and that the cation chloride cotransport inhibitor furosemide reversibly blocked synchronized discharges without reducing hyperexcited synaptic responses (Hochman et al. Science 270:99-102, 1995). Both abnormal expression of sodium channel genes (Waxman, Pain 6:S133-140,
1999; Waxman et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci USA 96:7635-7639, 1999) and pacemaker channels (Chaplan et al. J. Neurosci. 23: 1 169-1 178, 2003) are believed to play a role in the molecular basis of neuropathic pain.
Neuropsychiatric disorders, including anxiety disorders, are generally treated by counseling and/or with drugs. Many of the drugs currently employed in the treatment of such disorders have significant negative side effects, such as tendencies to induce dependence.
The cation-chloride co-transporters (CCCs) are important regulators of neuronal chloride concentration that are believed to influence cell-to-cell communication, and various aspects of neuronal development, plasticity and trauma. The CCC gene family consists of three broad groups: Na+-Cl" co-transporters (NCCs), K+-Cl" co-transporters (KCCs) and Na+-K+-2C1' co-transporters (NKCCs). Two NKCC isoforms have been identified: NKCC l is found in a wide variety of secretory epithelia and non-epithelial cells, whereas NKCC2 is principally expressed in the kidney. For a review of NKCCl structure, function and regulation see, Haas and Forbush, Annu. Rev. Physiol. 62:515-534, 2000. Randall et al. have identified two splice variants of the Slcl2a2 gene that encodes NKCCl, referred to as NKCCIa and NKCCIb (Am. J. Physiol. 273 {Cell Physiol. 42):C1267-1277, 1997). The NKCCl a gene has 27 exons, while the splice variant NKCCIb lacks exon 21. The NKCCIb splice variant is expressed primarily in the brain. NKCCIb is believed to be more than 10% more active than NKCCIa, although it is proportionally present in a much smaller amount in the brain than is NKCCIa. It has been suggested that differential splicing of the NKCCl transcript may play a regulatory role in human tissues (Vibat et al. Anal. Biochem. 298:218-230, 2001). Na-K-Cl co- transport in all cell and tissues is inhibited by loop diuretics, including furosemide, bumetanide and benzmetanide.
Na-K-2C1 co-transporter knock-out mice have been shown to have impaired nociception phenotypes as well as abnormal gait and locomotion (Sung et al. JnI. Neurosci. 20:7531-7538, 2000). Delpire and Mount have suggested that NKCCl may be involved in pain perception {Ann. Rev. Physiol. 64:803-843, 2002). Laird et al. recently described studies demonstrating reduced stroking hyperalgesia in NKCCl knock-out mice compared to wild-type and heterozygous mice {Neurosci. Letts. 361 :200-203, 2004). However, in this acute pain model no difference in punctuate hyperalgesia was observed between the three groups of mice. Morales-Aza et al. have suggested that, in arthritis, altered expression of NKCC 1 and the K-Cl co-transporter KCC2 may contribute to the control of spinal cord excitability and may thus represent therapeutic targets for the treatment of inflammatory pain {Neurobiol. Dis. 17:62-69, 2004). Granados-Soto et al. have described studies in rats in which formalin-induced nociception was reduced by administration of the NKCC inhibitors bumetanide, furosemide or piretanide {Pain 1 14:231-238, 2005). While the formalin-induced acute pain model is extensively used, it is believed to have little relevance to chronic pain conditions (Walker et al. MoI. Med. Today 5:319-321, 1999). Co-treatment of brain damage induced by episodic alcohol exposure with an NMDA receptor antagonist, non-NMDA receptor and Ca2+ channel antagonists together with furosemide has been shown to reduce alcohol-dependent cerebrocortical damage by 75-85%, while preventing brain hydration and electrolyte elevations (Collins et al, FASEB J., 12:221-230, 1998). The authors stated that the results suggest that furosemide and related agents might be useful as neuroprotective agents in alcohol abuse. Willis et al. have published studies indicating that nedocromil sodium, furosemide and bumetanide inhibit sensory nerve activation to reduce the itch and flare responses induced by histamine in human skin in vivo. Espinosa et al. and Ahmad et al. have previously suggested that furosemide might be useful in the treatment of certain types of epilepsy {Medicina Espanola 61 :280-281, 1969; and Brit. J. Clin. Pharmacol. 3:621-625, 1976). As with epilepsy, the focus of pharmacological intervention in neuropathic pain has been on reducing neuronal hyperexcitability. Most agents currently used to treat neuropathic pain target synaptic activity in excitatory pathways by, for example, modulating the release or activity of excitatory neurotransmitters, potentiating inhibitory pathways, blocking ion channels involved in impulse generation, and/or acting as membrane stabilizers. Conventional agents and therapeutic approaches for the treatment of neuropathic pain and neuropsychiatric disorders thus reduce neuronal excitability and inhibit synaptic firing. One serious drawback of these therapies is that they are nonselective and exert their actions on both normal and abnormal neuronal populations. This leads to negative and unintended side effects, which may affect normal CNS functions, such as cognition, learning and memory, and produce adverse physiological and psychological effects in the treated patient. Common side effects include over- sedation, dizziness, loss of memory and liver damage. There is therefore a continuing need for methods and compositions for treating neuronal disorders that disrupt hypersynchronized neuronal activity without diminishing the neuronal excitability and spontaneous synchronization required for normal functioning of the peripheral and central nervous systems.
Summary of the Invention
The treatment compositions and methods of the present invention are useful for treating conditions including neuropathic pain and neuropsychiatric disorders, such as bipolar disorders, anxiety disorders (including panic disorder, social anxiety disorder, obsessive compulsive disorder, posttraumatic stress disorder, generalized anxiety disorder and specific phobia (American Psychiatric Association, Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 4lh edition - Text Revision, 2000)), depression and schizophrenia, , that are characterized by neuronal hypersynchrony. The inventive compositions and methods may be employed to reduce neuronal hypersynchrony associated with neuropathic pain and/or neuropsychiatric disorders without suppressing neuronal excitability, thereby avoiding the unwanted side effects often associated with agents currently employed for the treatment of neuropathic pain and neuropsychiatric disorders.
The methods and compositions disclosed herein generally involve via non- synaptic mechanisms and modulate, generally reduce, the synchronization of neuronal population activity. The synchronization of neuronal population activity is modulated by manipulating anionic concentrations and gradients in the central and/or peripheral nervous systems. More specifically, the inventive compositions are capable of reducing the effective amount, inactivating, and/or inhibiting the activity of a Na+-K+-2C1' (NKCC) co-transporter. Especially preferred treatment agents of the present invention, exhibit a high degree of NKCC co-transporter antagonist activity in cells of the central and/or peripheral nervous system, e.g., glial cells, Schwann cells and/or neuronal cell populations, and exhibit a lesser degree of activity in renal cell populations. In one embodiment, the inventive compositions are capable of reducing the effective amount, inactivating, and/or inhibiting the activity of the co-transporter NKCCl . NKCCl antagonists are especially preferred treatment agents for use in the inventive methods. NKCC co-transporter antagonists that may be usefully employed in the inventive treatment compositions include, but are not limited to, CNS-targeted NKCC co- transporter antagonists such as furosemide, bumetanide, ethacrynic acid, torsemide, azosemide, muzolimine, piretanide, tripamide and the like, as well as thiazide and thiazide-like diuretics, such as bendroflumethiazide, benzthiazide, chlorothiazide, hydrochlorothiazide, hydroflumethiazide, methylclothiazide, polythiazide, trichlormethiazide, chlorthalidone, indapamide, metolazone and quinethazone, together with analogs and functional derivatives of such components.
Analogs of CNS-targeted NKCC co-transporter antagonists such as furosemide, bumetanide, piretanide, azosemide and torsemide that may be usefully employed in the inventive compositions and methods include those provided below as Formulas I-V. The inventors believe that such analogs have increased lipophilicity and reduced diuretic effects compared to the CNS-targeted NKCC co-transporter antagonists from which they are derived and thus result in fewer undesirable side effects when employed in the inventive treatment methods. In one embodiment, the level of diuresis that occurs following administration of an effective amount of an analog provided below as Formula I-V, is less than 99%, 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20% or 10% of that which occurs following administration of an effective amount of the parent molecule from which the analog is derived. For example, the analog may be less diuretic than the parent molecule when administered at the same mg/kg dose. Alternatively, the analog may be more potent than the parent molecule from which it is derived, so that a smaller dose of the analog is required for effective relief of symptoms, thereby eliciting less of a diuretic effect. Similarly, the analog may have a longer duration of effect in treating disorders than the parent molecule, so that the analog may be administered less frequently than the parent molecule, thus leading to a lower total diuretic effect within any given period of time.
Other treatment agents that may be usefully employed in the inventive compositions and methods include, but are not limited to: antibodies, or antigen-binding fragments thereof, that specifically bind to NKCCl ; soluble NKCCl ligands; small molecule inhibitors of NKCCl; anti-sense oligonucleotides to NKCCl ; NKCCl -specific small interfering RNA molecules (siRNA or RNAi); and engineered soluble NKCCl molecules. Preferably, such antibodies, or antigen-binding fragments thereof, and small molecule inhibitors of NKCCl specifically bind to the domains of NKCCl involved in bumetanide binding, as described, for example, in Haas and Forbush II, Annu. Rev. Physiol. 62:515-534, 2000. The polypeptide sequence for human NKCCl is provided in SEQ ID NO: 1, with the corresponding cDNA sequence being provided in SEQ ID NO: 2.
As the methods and treatment agents of the present invention employ "non- synaptic" mechanisms, little or no suppression of neuronal excitability occurs. More specifically, the inventive treatment agents cause little (less than a 1% change compared to pre-administration levels) or no suppression of action potential generation or excitatory synaptic transmission. In fact, a slight increase in neuronal excitability may occur upon administration of certain of the inventive treatment agents. This is in marked contrast to conventional anti-epileptic drugs currently used in the treatment of neuropathic pain, which do suppress neuronal excitability. The methods and treatment agents of the present invention affect the synchronization, or relative synchrony, of neuronal population activity. Preferred methods and treatment agents modulate the extracellular anionic chloride concentration and/or the gradients in the central or peripheral nervous system to reduce neuronal synchronization, or relative synchrony, without substantially affecting neuronal excitability.
In one aspect, the present invention relates to methods and agents for relieving neuropathic pain, or the abnormal perception of pain, by affecting or modulating spontaneous hypersynchronized bursts of neuronal activity and the propagation of action potentials or conduction of impulses in certain cells and nerve fibers of the peripheral nervous system, for example, primary sensory afferent fibers, pain fibers, dorsal horn neurons, and supraspinal sensory and pain pathways.
The inventive treatment agents may be employed in combination with other, known, treatment agents, such as those presently used in the treatment of neuropsychiatric disorders. One of skill in the art will appreciate that the combination of a treatment agent of the present invention with another, known, treatment agent may involve both synaptic and non-synaptic mechanisms.
Treatment compositions and methods of the present invention may be used therapeutically and episodically following the onset of symptoms or prophylactically, prior to the onset of specific symptoms. For example, treatment agents of the present invention can be used to treat existing neuropathic pain or to protect nerves from neurotoxic injury and neuropathic pain secondary to chemotherapy, radiotherapy, exposure to infectious agents, and the like.
In certain embodiments, the treatment agents employed in the inventive methods are capable of crossing the blood brain barrier, and/or are administered using delivery systems that facilitate delivery of the agents to the central nervous system. For example, various blood brain barrier (BBB) permeability enhancers can be used, if desired, to transiently and reversibly increase the permeability of the blood brain barrier to a treatment agent. Such BBB permeability enhancers may include leukotrienes, bradykinin agonists, histamine, tight junction disruptors (e.g., zonulin), hyperosmotic solutions (e.g., mannitol), cytoskeletal contracting agents, short chain alkylglycerols (e.g., l-O- pentylglycerol), and others which are currently known in the art.
The above-mentioned and additional features of the present invention, together with the manner of obtaining them, will be best understood by reference to the following more detailed description. All references disclosed herein are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety as if each was incorporated individually.
Brief Description of the Drawings
Figs. IA, IAl , IB, IBl , 1C, ICl and ID show the effect of furosemide on stimulation evoked after discharge activity in rat hippocampal slices.
Figs. 2A - 2R show furosemide blockade of spontaneous epileptiform burst discharges across a spectrum of in vitro models. Figs. 3A - 3H show furosemide blockade of kainic acid-evoked electrical "status epilepticus" in urethane-anesthetized rats, with EKG recordings shown in the upper traces and cortical EEG recordings shown in the bottom traces.
Figs. 4A and 4B show a schematic diagram of ion co-transport under conditions of reduced chloride concentration. Fig. 5 shows that significantly less freezing was observed in animals treated with either bumetanide or furosemide than in animals receiving vehicle alone in a test of contextual fear conditioning in rats.
Fig. 6 shows baseline startle amplitudes in a fear potentiated startle test in rats Fig. 7 shows the amplitude of response in rats on startle alone trials determined immediately following administration of either DMSO alone, bumetanide or furosemide.
Fig. 8 shows the difference score (startle alone - fear potentiated startle) on the test day in rats treated with either DMSO, bumetanide or furosemide
Fig. 9 shows the startle alone amplitude in rats one week after administration of either DMSO, bumetanide or furosemide. Fig. 10 shows the difference score in rats one week after administration of either
DMSO, bumetanide or furosemide.
Fig. 11 shows the difference score (startle alone - fear potentiated startle) on the test day in rats treated with one of the following bumetanide analogs: bumetanide N5N- diethylglycolamide ester (referred to as 2MIK053); bumetanide methyl ester (referred to as 3MIK054); bumetanide N,N-dimethylglycolamide ester (referred to as 3MIK069-11); bumetanide morpholinodethyl ester (referred to as 3MIK066-4); bumetanide pivaxetil ester (referred to as 3MIK069-12); bumetanide cyanomethyl ester (referred to as
3MIK047); bumetanide dibenzylamide (referred to as 3MIK065); and bumetanide 3-
(dimethyl-aminoproply) ester (referred to as 3MIK066-5). The vehicle was DMSO. Fig. 12 shows the difference score in rats treated with different doses of bumetanide.
Fig. 13 shows the output of urine in rats following administration of either bumetanide from two different sources (columns 1 and 5), bumetanide N ,N- diethylglycolamide ester (column 2), bumetanide pivaxetil ester (column 3), bumetanide cyanomethyl ester (column 4) of saline (column 6). Detailed Description of the Invention
As discussed above, preferred treatment agents and methods of the present invention, for use in treating neuropathic pain and/or neuropsychiatric disorders, modulate or disrupt the synchrony of neuronal population activity in areas of heightened synchronization by reducing the activity of NKCC co-transporters. As described in detail below and illustrated in the examples, movement of ions and modulation of ionic gradients by means of ion-dependent co-transporters, preferably cation-chloride dependent co-transporters, is critical to regulation of neuronal synchronization. Chloride co-transport function has long been thought to be directed primarily to movement of chloride out of cells. The sodium independent transporter, which has been shown to be neuronally localized, moves chloride ions out of neurons. Blockade of this transporter, such as by administration of the loop diuretic furosemide, leads to hyperexcitability, which is the short-term response to cation-chloride co-transporters such as furosemide. However, the long-term response to furosemide demonstrates that the inward, sodium- dependent movement of chloride ions, mediated by the glial associated Na+-K+-2C1~ co- transporter NKCCl, plays an active role in blocking neuronal synchronization, without affecting excitability and stimulus-evoked cellular activity. Haglund and Hochman have demonstrated that furosemide is able to block epileptic activity in humans while not affecting normal brain activity (J. Neurophysiol. (Feb. 23, 2005) doi: 10.1152/ jn.00944.2004). These results provide support for the belief that the inventive methods and compositions may be effectively employed in the treatment of neuropathic pain without giving rise to undesirable side effects often seen with conventional treatments.
As discussed above, the NKCCl splice variant referred to as NKCCIb is more active than the NKCCIa variant. A central or peripheral nervous system which expresses a few more percentage NKCCIb may thus be more prone to disorders such as neuropathic pain and epilepsy. Similarly, a treatment agent that is more specific for NKCCIb compared to NKCCIa may be more effective in the treatment of such disorders.
The inventive methods may be used for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of neuropathic pain having, for example, the following etiologies: alcohol abuse; diabetes; eosinophilia-myalgia syndrome; Guillain-Barre syndrome; exposure to heavy metals such as arsenic, lead, mercury, and thallium; HIV/AIDS; exposure to anti-HIV/AIDS drugs; malignant tumors; medications including amiodarone, aurothioglucose, cisplatinum, dapsone, stavudine, zalcitabine, didanosine, disulfiram, FK506, hydralazine, isoniazid, metronidazole, nitrofurantoin, paclitaxel, phenytoin and vincristine; monoclonal gammopathies; multiple sclerosis; post-stroke central pain, postherpetic neuralgia; trauma including carpal tunnel syndrome, cervical or lumbar radiculopathy, complex regional pain syndrome, spinal cord injury and stump pain; trigeminal neuralgia; vasculitis; vitamin B6 megadosing; and certain vitamin deficiencies (B 12, Bl, B6, E). Neuropsychiatric disorders that may be effectively treated using the inventive methods include, but are not limited to, bipolar disorders, anxiety disorders, panic disorders, depression, schizophrenia, obsessive-compulsive disorders and post-traumatic stress syndrome.
Compositions that may be effectively employed in the inventive methods are capable of reducing the effective amount, inactivating, and/or inhibiting the activity of a Na+-K+-2Cr (NKCC) co-transporter. Preferably such compositions are capable of reducing the effective amount, inactivating, and/or inhibiting the activity of the co- transporter NKCCl. In certain embodiments, the inventive compositions comprise at least one treatment agent selected from the group consisting of: antagonists of NKCCl (including but not limited to, small molecule inhibitors of NKCCl, antibodies, or antigen- binding fragments thereof, that specifically bind to NKCCl and soluble NKCCl ligands); anti-sense oligonucleotides to NKCCl; NKCCl -specific small interfering RNA molecules (siRNA or RNAi); and engineered soluble NKCCl molecules. In preferred embodiments, the treatment agent is selected from the group consisting of: CNS-targeted NKCC co-transporter antagonists such as furosemide, bumetanide, ethacrynic acid, torsemide, azosemide, muzolimine, piretanide, tripamide and the like; thiazide and thiazide-like diuretics, such as bendroflumethiazide, benzthiazide, chlorothiazide, hydrochlorothiazide, hydro-flumethiazide, methylclothiazide, polythiazide, trichlormethiazide, chlorthalidone, indapamide, metolazone and quinethazone; and analogs and functional derivatives of such components. Analogs of CNS-targeted NKCC co-transporter antagonists that may be employed in the inventive methods include compounds according to formula I, II and/or III:
Figure imgf000012_0001
Figure imgf000013_0001
II
Figure imgf000013_0002
III
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, tautomer or hydrate thereof, wherein
Ri is not present, H or O;
R2 is H or when Ri is O, is selected from the group consisting of: alkylaminodialkyl, alkylaminocarbonyldialkyl, alkyloxycarbonylalkyl, alkylaldehyde, alkylketoalkyl, alkylamide, an alkylammonium group, alkylcarboxylic acid, alkylheteroaryls, alkylhydroxy, a biocompatible polymer such as alkyloxy(polyalkyloxy)alkylhydroxyl, a polyethylene glycol (PEG), a polyethylene glycol ester (PEG ester), a polyethylene glycol ether (PEG ether), methyloxyalkyl, methyloxyalkaryl, methylthioalkylalkyl and methylthioalkaryl, unsubstituted or substituted, and when Ri is not present, R2 is selected from the group consisting of: hydrogen, dialkylamino, diarylamino, dialkylaminodialkyl, dialkylcarbonylaminodialkyl, dialkylesteralkyl, dialkylaldehyde, dialkylketoalkyl, dialkylamido, dialkylcarboxylic acid, and dialkylheteroaryls, unsubstituted or substituted;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of: aryl, halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, and aryloxy, unsubstituted or substituted; and R4 and R5 are each independently selected from the group consisting of: hydrogen, alkylaminodialkyl, alkylhydroxyaminodiakyl, unsubstituted or substituted:
In some embodiments of the present invention, the analog can be bumetanide aldehyde, bumetanide dibenzylamide, bumetanide diethylamide, bumetanide morpholinoethyl ester, bumetanide 3-(dimethylaminopropyl) ester, bumetanide N,N- diethylglycolamide ester, bumetanide dimethylglycolamide ester, bumetanide pivaxetil ester, bumetanide methoxy(polyethyleneoxy)n-i -ethyl ester,_bumetanide benzyltrimethyl- ammonium salt, and bumetanide cetyltrimethylammonium salt.
According to further embodiments of the present invention, the analog can be furosemide aldehyde, furosemide ethyl ester, furosemide cyanomethyl ester, furosemide benzyl ester, furosemide morpholinoethyl ester, furosemide 3-(dimethylaminopropyl) ester, furosemide N,N-diethylglycolamide ester, furosemide dibenzylamide, furosemide benzyltrimethylammoniurn salt, furosemide cetyltrimethylammonium salt, furosemide N,N-dimethylglycolamide ester, furosemide methoxy(polyethyleneoxy)n-i -ethyl ester, furosemide pivaxetil ester and furosemide propaxetil ester. In still further embodiments of the present invention, the analog can be piretanide aldehyde, piretanide methyl ester, piretanide cyanomethyl ester, piretanide benzyl ester, piretanide morpholinoethyl ester, piretanide 3-(dimethylaminopropyl) ester, piretanide N,N-diethylglycolamide ester, piretanide diethylamide, piretanide dibenzylamide, piretanide benzylltrimethylammonium salt, piretanide cetylltrimethylarnrnonium salt, piretanide N,N-dimethylglycolamide ester, piretanide methoxy(polyethyleneoxy)n-i -ethyl ester, piretanide pivaxetil ester and/or piretanide propaxetil ester.
Analogs of CNS-targeted NKCC co-transporter anatagonists that may be usefully employed in the methods of the present invention further include compounds according to formula IV:
Figure imgf000014_0001
IV or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, tautomer or hydrate thereof, wherein
R.3, R4 and R5 are defined above; and
Re is selected from the group consisting of: alkyloxycarbonylalkyl, alkylaminocarbonyldialkyl, alkylaminodialkyl, alkylhydroxy, a biocompatible polymer such as alkyloxy(polyalkyloxy)alkylhydroxyl, a polyethylene glycol (PEG), a polyethylene glycol ester (PEG ester), a polyethylene glycol ether (PEG ether), methyloxyalkyl, methyloxyalkaryl, methylthioalkyl and methylthioalkaryl, unsubstituted or substituted.
In some embodiments of the present invention, the analog may be selected from the group consisting of: tetrazolyl-substituted azosemides (such as methoxymethyl tetrazolyl-substituted azosemides, methylthiomethyl tetrazolyl-substituted azosemides and N-mPEG350-tetrazolyl-substituted azosemides), azosemide benzyltrimethylammonium salt and/or azosemide cetyltrimethylammonium salt.
Analogs that may usefully be employed in the inventive methods further include compounds according to formula V:
Figure imgf000015_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, tautomer or hydrate thereof, wherein R7 is selected from the group consisting of: alkyloxycarbonylalkyl, alkylaminocarbonyldialkyl, alkylaminodialkyl, alkylhydroxy, a biocompatible polymer such as alkyloxy(polyalkyloxy)alkylhydroxyl, a polyethylene glycol (PEG), a polyethylene glycol ester (PEG ester), a polyethylene glycol ether (PEG ether), methyloxyalkyl, methyloxyalkaryl, methylthioalkyl and methylthioalkaryl, unsubstituted or substituted; and X" is a halide such as bromide, chloride, fluoride, iodide or an anionic moiety such as mesylate or tosylate; alternatively, X' is not present and the compound forms an "inner" or zwitterionic salt by loss of a proton from the sulfonylurea moiety (-SO2-NH- CO-).
In some embodiments of the present invention, the analog may be selected from the group consisting of: pyridine-substituted torsemide quaternary ammonium salts or the corresponding inner salts (zwitterions). Examples include, but are not limited to, methoxymethyl pyridinium torsemide salts, methylthiomethyl pyridinium torsemide salts and N-mPEG350-pyridinium torsemide salts.
Any of the R groups as defined herein can be excluded from the analogs disclosed herein.
Intermediate compounds formed through the synthetic methods described below to provide the compounds of formula I, II, III, IV and/or V may also possess utility as a therapeutic agent for neuropsychiatric disorders described herein.
Modification of the CNS-targeted NKCC co-transport antagonists employed in the inventive methods can include reacting the antagonist with a functional group and/or compound selected from the group consisting of: an aluminum hydride, alkyl halide, alcohol, aldehyde, aryl halide, alkyl amide, aryl amine and quaternary ammonium salt, unsubstituted or substituted, or combinations thereof. Non-limiting examples of compounds that may be used as a starting material are exemplified below.
Figure imgf000016_0001
bumetanidβ furosemidβ
Merck Index. 13th Merck Index. 13th Edition, 2001 , 1471. Edition, 2001 , 4330.
Figure imgf000017_0001
piretanide azosemide
Merck Index. 13th Merck Index. 13th Edition, 2001 , 7575 Edition, 2001 , 924.
Figure imgf000017_0002
The term "alkyl" as used herein refers to a straight or branched chain saturated or partially unsaturated hydrocarbon radical. Examples of alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl and the like. By "unsaturated" is meant the presence of 1 , 2 or 3 double or triple bonds, or a combination thereof. Such alkyl groups may be optionally substituted as described below. The term "alkylene" as used herein refers to a straight or branched chain having two terminal monovalent radical centers derived by the removal of one hydrogen atom from each of the two terminal carbon atoms of straight-chain parent alkane.
The term "aryl" as used herein refers to an aromatic group or to an optionally substituted aromatic group fused to one or more optionally substituted aromatic groups, optionally substituted with suitable substituents including, but not limited to, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylsulfanyl, lower alkylsulfenyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, oxo, hydroxy, mercapto, amino optionally substituted by alkyl, carboxy, tetrazolyl, carbamoyl optionally substituted by alkyl, aminosulfonyl optionally substituted by alkyl, acyl, aroyl, heteroaroyl, acyloxy, aroyloxy, heteroaroyloxy, alkoxycarbonyl, nitro, cyano, halogen, or lower perfluoroalkyl, multiple degrees of substitution being allowed. Examples of aryl include, but are not limited to, phenyl, 2-naphthyl, 1-naphthyl, and the like. The term "halo" as used herein refers to bromo, chloro, fluoro or iodo.
Alternatively, the term "halide" as used herein refers to bromide, chloride, fluoride or iodide.
The term "hydroxy" as used herein refers to the group -OH. The term "alkoxy" as used herein alone or as part of another group, refers to an alkyl group, as defined herein, appended to the parent molecular moiety through an oxy group. Representative examples of alkoxy include, but are not limited to, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, 2-propoxy, butoxy, tert-butoxy, pentyloxy, hexyloxy and the like.
The term "aryloxy" as used herein refers to the group -ArO wherein Ar is aryl or heteroaryl. Examples include, but are not limited to, phenoxy, benzyloxy and 2- naphthyloxy.
The term "amino" as used herein refers to -NH2 in which one or both of the hydrogen atoms may optionally be replaced by alkyl or aryl or one of each, optionally substituted.
The term "alkylthio" as used herein alone or as part of another group, refers to an alkyl group, as defined herein, appended to the parent molecular moiety through a sulfur moiety. Representative examples of alkylthio include, but are not limited to, methylthio, ethylthio, n-propylthio, isopropylthio, n-butylthio, and the like.
The term "carboxy" as used herein refers to the group -CO2H. The term "quaternary ammonium" as used herein refers to a chemical structure having four bonds to the nitrogen with a positive charge on the nitrogen in the "onium" state, i.e., "R4N+ or "quaternary nitrogen," wherein R is an organic substituent such as alkyl or aryl. The term "quaternary ammonium salt" as used herein refers to the association of the quaternary ammonium with a cation.
The term "substituted" as used herein refers to replacement of one or more of the hydrogen atoms of the group replaced by substituents known to those skilled in the art and resulting in a stable compound as described below. Examples of suitable replacement groups include, but are not limited to, alkyl, acyl, alkenyl, alkynyl cycloalkyl, aryl, hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, acyl, amino, amido, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, carboxyaryl, halo, oxo, mercapto, sulfϊnyl, sulfonyl, sulfonamido, amidino, carbamoyl, dialkoxymethyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, carboxylic acid, carboxamido, haloalkyl, alkylthio, aralkyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylthio, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, guanidino, ureido and the like. Substitutions are permissible when such combinations result in compounds stable for the intended purpose. For example, substitutions are permissible when the resultant compound is sufficiently robust to survive isolation to a useful degree of purity from a reaction mixture, and formulation into a therapeutic or diagnostic agent.
The term "solvate" as used herein is intended to refer to a pharmaceutically acceptable solvate form of a specified compound that retains the biological effectiveness of such compound, for example, resulting from a physical association of the compound with one or more solvent molecules. Examples of solvates, without limitation, include compounds of the invention in combination with water, isopropanol, ethanol, methanol, DMSO, ethyl acetate, acetic acid, or ethanolamine.
The term "hydrate" as used herein refers to the compound when the solvent is water. The term "biocompatible polymer" as used herein refers to a polymer moiety that is substantially non-toxic and does not tend to produce substantial immune responses, clotting or other undesirable effects. Polyalkylene glycol is a biocompatible polymer where, as used herein, polyalkylene glycol refers to straight or branched polyalkylene glycol polymers such as polyethylene glycol, polypropylene glycol, and polybutylene glycol, and further includes the monoalkylether of the polyalkylene glycol. In some embodiments of the present invention, the polyalkylene glycol polymer is a lower alkyl polyalkylene glycol moiety such as a polyethylene glycol moiety (PEG), a polypropylene glycol moiety, or a polybutylene glycol moiety. PEG has the formula - HO(CH2CH2θ)nH, where n can range from about 1 to about 4000 or more. In some embodiments, n is 1 to 100, and in other embodiments, n is 5 to 30. The PEG moiety can be linear or branched. In further embodiments, PEG can be attached to groups such as hydroxyl, alkyl, aryl, acyl or ester. In some embodiments, PEG can be an alkoxy PEG, such as methoxy-PEG (or mPEG), where one terminus is a relatively inert alkoxy group, while the other terminus is a hydroxyl group. The compounds of formula I, II, III, IV and/or V can be synthesized using traditional synthesis techniques well known to those skilled in the art. More specific synthesis routes are described below.
The bumetanide analogs are synthesized by reacting the carboxylic acid moiety of bumetanide with various reagents. For example, bumetanide may undergo esterification via reaction with alcohols, including linear, branched, substituted, or unsubstituted alcohols. Bumetanide may also be alkylated via reaction with suitable substituted and unsubstituted alkyl halides and aryl halides, including chloroacetonitrile, benzyl chloride, l -(dimethylamino)propyl chloride, 2-chloro-N,N-diethylacetamide, and the like. PEG- type esters may be formed by alkylation using alkyloxy(polyalkyloxy)alkyl halides such as MeO-PEG350-Cl and the like, or alkyloxy(polyalkyloxy)alkyl tosylates such as MeO- PEGlOOO-OTs and the like. "Axetil"-type esters may also be formed by alkylation using alkyl halides such as chloromethyl pivalate or chloromethyl propionate. Bumetanide may also undergo amidation by reaction with suitable substituted or unsubstituted alkyl amines or aryl amines, either after conversion to the acid chloride or by using an activator, such as l-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylarninopropyl)carbodiimide (EDC). Bumetanide may also be reacted with a quaternary ammonium hydroxide, such as benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide or cetyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, to form bumetanide quaternary ammonium salts. Schemes 1 and 7 below presents a synthesis scheme of some exemplary compounds according to formula I.
Scheme 1. Synthesis of Exemplary Compounds According to Formula I.
Figure imgf000021_0001
esters
amides methyl, ethyl, benzyl, benzyl,
Figure imgf000021_0002
The furosemide analogs are synthesized by methods analogous to those used in the synthesis of the bumetanide analogs. Specifically, furosemide may undergo esterification via reaction with alcohols, including linear, branched, substituted, or unsubstituted alcohols Furosemide may also be alkylated via reaction with suitable substituted and unsubstituted alkyl hahdes and aryl hahdes, including for example, chloroacetonitπle, benzyl chloride, 1 -(dimethylamino)propyl chloride, 2-chloro-N,N- diethylacetamide, and the like. PEG-type esters may be formed by alkylation using alkyloxy(polyalkyloxy)alkyl hahdes such as MeO-PEG350-Cl and the like, or alkyloxy(polyalkyloxy)alkyl tosylates such as MeO-PEGlOOO-OTs and the like. "Axetil"-type esters may also be formed by alkylation using alkyl halides such as chloromethyl pivalate or chloromethyl propionate. Furosemide may also undergo amidation by reaction with suitable substituted or unsubstituted alkyl amines or aryl amines, either after conversion to the acid chloride or by using an activator, such as 1- ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide (EDC). Furosemide may also be reacted with a quaternary ammonium hydroxide, such as benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide or cetyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, to form furosemide quaternary ammonium salts. Scheme 2 below presents a synthesis scheme of some exemplary compounds according to formula II.
Scheme 2. Synthesis of Exemplary Compounds According to Formula II.
rY
esters
Figure imgf000023_0001
simple amides
Figure imgf000023_0002
The piretamde analogs are synthesized by methods analogous to those used in the synthesis of the bumetanide analogs Specifically, piretamde may undergo esteπfication via reaction with alcohols, including linear, branched, substituted, or unsubstituted alcohols Piretamde may also be alkylated via reaction with suitable substituted and unsubstituted alkyl hahdes and aryl hahdes, including chloroacetonitπle, benzyl chloride,
1 -(dimethylamino)propyl chloride, 2-chloro-N,N-diethylacetamide, and the like. PEG- type esters may be formed by alkylation using alkyloxy(polyalkyloxy)alkyl hahdes such as MeO-PEG350-Cl and the like, or alkyloxy(polyalkyloxy)alkyl tosylates such as MeO-
PEGIOOO-OTs and the like "Axetil"-type esters may also be formed by alkylation by using alkyl halides such as chloromethyl pivalate or chloromethyl propionate. Piretanide may also undergo amidation by reaction with suitable substituted or unsubstituted alkyl amines or aryl amines, either after conversion to the acid chloride or by using an activator, such as l-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide (EDC). Piretanide may also be reacted with a quaternary ammonium hydroxide, such as benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide or cetyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, to form piretanide quaternary ammonium salts. Scheme 3 below presents a synthesis scheme of some exemplary compounds according to formula III.
Scheme 3. Synthesis of Exemplary Compounds According to Formula III.
Figure imgf000025_0001
1 piretan
esters
Figure imgf000025_0002
amides methyl ethyl benzyl ethy ben/y|
Figure imgf000025_0003
The azosemide analogs are synthesized by the reaction of various reagents with the tetrazolyl moiety of azosemide. Azosemide may undergo hydroxyalkylation with the addition of an aldehyde, whereby a hydroxylalkyl functionality is formed. An alcohol may optionally be reacted along with the aldehyde to obtain an ether. An alkyl thiol may optionally be added with the aldehyde to form a thioether. Azosemide may also be alkylated by the addition of suitable alkyl halides or aryl halides, including alkyl or aryl halides comprising an ether or thioether linkage, such as methyl chloromethyl ether and benzyl chloromethyl thioether. PEG-type ethers may be formed by alkylation using alkyloxy(polyalkyloxy)alkyl halides such as MeO-PEG350-Cl and the like, or alkyloxy(polyalkyloxy)alkyl tosylates such as MeO-PEGlOOO-OTs and the like. "Axetil"-type analogs may also be formed via addition of alkyl or aryl halides, such as chloromethyl pivalate or chloromethyl propionate. Azosemide may be reacted with a quaternary ammonium salt, such as benzyltrimethylammoniumbromide and base such as sodium hydroxide or cetyltrimethylammonium bromide and base such as sodium hydroxide, in order to form an azosemide quaternary ammonium salt. Scheme 4 below presents a synthesis scheme of some exemplary compounds according to formula IV.
Scheme 4. Synthesis of Exemplary Compounds According to Formula IV.
Figure imgf000027_0001
alkanols
1 azosemide
N-alkylatιoπ route
XCH(R)OCOR1 Et3N base ethers rY
Figure imgf000027_0002
thioethers
Figure imgf000027_0003
6 azosemide N-substituted "axetιl"-type R = H, methyl R' = H, methyl, ethyl t-butyl
The torsemide (also known as torasemide) analogs are synthesized by the reaction of various reagents with the pyridine moiety of torsemide Torsemide may undergo alkylation by the addition of suitable alkyl or aryl hahdes, including benzyl chloride, to form N-substituted quaternary ammonium salts Alkyl hahdes and aryl hahdes comprising an ether linkage, including methyl chloromethyl ether and benzyl chloromethyl ether, may be used to form N-substituted ether quaternary ammonium salts Alkyl hahdes and aryl hahdes comprising a thioether linkage, including methyl chloromethyl thioether and benzyl chloromethyl thioether, may be used to form N- substituted thioether quaternary ammonium salts. PEG-type ether-containing quaternary ammonium salts may be formed by alkylation using alkyloxy(polyalkyloxy)alkyl halides such as.MeO-PEG350-Cl and the like, or alkyloxy(polyalkyloxy)alkyl tosylates such as MeO-PEGlOOO-OTs and the like. "Axetil"-type quaternary ammonium salts may also be formed via the addition of alkyl halides such as chloromethyl pivalate or chloromethyl propionate. Scheme 5 below presents a synthesis scheme of some exemplary compounds according to formula V.
Scheme 5. Synthesis of Exemplary Compounds According to Formula V.
H1C
Figure imgf000029_0001
ether
Figure imgf000029_0002
The substituted benzoic acids bumetanide, piretanide and furosemide can be selectively reduced to the corresponding bumetanide aldehyde, piretanide aldehyde and furosemide aldehyde using amine-substituted ammonium hydrides such as bis(4- methylpiperazinyl)aluminum hydride by literature methods See Muraki, M. and
Mukiayama, T , Chem Letters, 1974, 1447; Muraki, M and Mukiayama, T , Chem
Letters, 1975, 215; and Hubert, T et al., J Org Chem , 1984, 2279 It is well known that the more lipophilic benzaldehydes readily air-oxidize into the more hydrophilic benzoic acids and that benzaldehydes are also metabolized into the corresponding benzoic acids in vivo, via the use of NADPH co-factor and with a number of oxidative P450 enzymes.
Scheme 6. Synthesis of Exemplary Benzaldehyde Analogs of Bumetanide,
Piretanide and Furosemide.
Figure imgf000030_0001
bumetanide "bumetanide aldehyde"
R1 = , R2 = H,
R3 = O-aryl, R4 = R5 = H
Figure imgf000030_0002
"furosemide aldehyde" furosemidθ R^ = , R2 — H,
R3 = halide, R4 = R5 = H
Figure imgf000030_0003
piretanide "piretanide aldehyde"
Ri = , R2 = H,
R3 = O-aryl, R4 = R5 = H
For reduction procedures used to convert benzoic acids to the corresponding benzaldehydes, see Muraki, M and Mukiayama, T , Chem Letters. 1974, 1447, ibid, 1975, 215, Hubert, T , D , Eyman, D P and Wiemer, D F , J Orα Chem . 1984, 2279 Scheme 7. Synthesis of Exemplary Polyethylene Glycol Esters of Bumetanide,
Furosemide and Piretanide.
Figure imgf000031_0001
bumetanide "bumetanide PEG esters" R2 = OCH2CH2(OCH2CH2)n.,-Y R3 = O-aryl, R4 = R5 = H m = 1 - 5, n = 1 - 100
Figure imgf000031_0002
"furosemide PEG esters" R2 = OCH2CH2(OCH2CH2)n.,-Y furosemide R3 = chloride, R4 = R5 = H m = 1 - 5, n = 1 - 100
Figure imgf000031_0003
"piretanide PEG esters" piretanide R2 = OCH2CH2(OCH2CH2)n.,-Y
R3 = O-aryl, R4 = R5 = H m = 1 - 5, n = 1 - 100
PEG-X is X-(CH2)m(OCH2CH2)n.,-Y, where X is halo or other leaving group (mesylate "OMs", tosylate "OTs") and Y is OH or an alcohol protecting group such as an alkyl group, an aryl group, an acyl group or an ester group, and where m = 1 -5 and n = 1 -100 Scheme 8. Synthesis of Exemplary Alkyl Polyethylene Glycol Ethers of Azosemide and Torsemide.
Figure imgf000032_0001
azosemide "azosemide methyl PEG ethers" R6 = (CH2)mOCH2CH2(OCH2CH2)n.,-Y R3 = chloride, R4 = R5 = H m = 1 - 5, n = 1 - 100
Figure imgf000032_0002
torsemide "torsemide methyl PEG ether quaternary ammonium salts" R7 = (CH2)mOCH2CH2(OCH2CH2)n.,-Y X~ = halide, mesylate, tosylate m = 1 - 5, n = 1 - 100
PEG-X is X-(CH2)m(OCH2CH2)n.rY, where X is halo or other leaving group (mesylate "OMs", tosylate "OTs") and Y is OH or an alcohol protecting group such as an alkyl group, an aryl group, an acyl group or an ester group, and where m = 1 -5 and π = 1 - 100 Starting materials for synthesizing compounds of the present invention can further include compounds described in U.S. Patent No. 3,634,583 to Feit; U.S. Patent No. 3,806,534 to Fiet; U.S. Patent No. 3,058,882 to Struem et al.; U.S. Patent No. 4,010,273 to Bormann; U.S. Patent No. 3,665,002 to Popelak; and U.S. Patent No. 3,665,002 to Delarge, the disclosures of which are hereby incorporated by reference. Compounds of the present invention can include isomers, tautomers, zwitterions, enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates or stereochemical mixtures thereof. The term "isomers" as used herein refers to compounds having the same number and kind of atoms, and hence the same molecular weight, but differing with respect to the arrangement or configuration of the atoms in space. Additionally, the term "isomers" includes stereoisomers and geometric isomers. The terms "stereoisomer" or "optical isomer" as used herein refer to a stable isomer that has at least one chiral atom or restricted rotation giving rise to perpendicular dissymmetric planes (e.g., certain biphenyls, allenes, and spiro compounds) and can rotate plane-polarized light. Because asymmetric centers and other chemical structures can exist in some of the compounds of the present invention which may give rise to stereoisomerism, the invention contemplates stereoisomers and mixtures thereof. The compounds of the present invention and their salts can include asymmetric carbon atoms and may therefore exist as single stereoisomers, racemates, and as mixtures of enantiomers and diastereomers. Typically, such compounds will be prepared as a racemic mixture. If desired, however, such compounds can be prepared or isolated as pure stereoisomers, i.e. as individual enantiomers or diastereomers, or as stereoisomer-enriched mixtures. Tautomers are readily interconvertible constitutional isomers and there is a change in connectivity of a ligand, as in the keto and enol forms of ethyl acetoacetate. The inventive methods and compositions may employ tautomers of any of said compounds. Zwitterions are inner salts or dipolar compounds possessing acidic and basic groups in the same molecule. At neutral pH, the cation and anion of most zwitterions are equally ionized.
The present invention further provides prodrugs comprising the compounds described herein. The term "prodrug" is intended to refer to a compound that is converted under physiological conditions, by solvolysis or metabolically, to a specified compound that is pharmaceutically/pharmacologically active. The prodrug can be a compound of the present invention that has been chemically derivatized such that: (i) it retains some, all or none of the bioactivity of its parent drug compound, and (ii) it is metabolized in a subject to yield the parent drug compound. The prodrug of the present invention may also be a "partial prodrug" in that the compound has been chemically derivatized such that: (i) it retains some, all or none of the bioactivity of its parent drug compound, and (ii) it is metabolized in a subject to yield a biologically active derivative of the compound. The prodrugs can be formed utilizing a hydrolyzable coupling to the compounds described herein. A further discussion of prodrugs can be found in Ettmayer et al. J. Med. Chem. 47( 10):2394-2404 (2004). Prodrugs of the present invention are capable of passage across the blood-brain barrier and may undergo hydrolysis by CNS esterases to provide the active compound. Further, the prodrugs provided herein may also exhibit improved bioavailability, improved aqueous solubility, improved passive intestinal absorption, improved transporter-mediated intestinal absorption, protection against accelerated metabolism, tissue-selective delivery and/or passive enrichment in the target tissue.
Prodrugs of the present invention can include compounds according to formula I, II, III, IV and/or V described herein. Prodrugs of the present invention can further include bumetanide, bumetanide dibenzylamide, bumetanide diethylamide, bumetanide morpholinoethyl ester, bumetanide 3-(dimethylaminopropyl) ester, bumetanide N,N- diethylglycolamide ester, bumetanide dimethylglycolamide ester, bumetanide pivaxetil ester, furosemide, furosemide ethyl ester, furosemide cyanomethyl ester, furosemide benzyl ester, furosemide morpholinoethyl ester, furosemide 3-(dimethylaminopropyl) ester, furosemide N,N-diethylglycolamide ester, furosemide dibenzylamide, furosemide benzyltrimethyl-ammonium salt, furosemide cetyltrimethylammonium salt, furosemide N,N-dimethylglycolamide ester, furosemide pivaxetil ester, furosemide propaxetil ester, piretanide, piretanide methyl ester, piretanide cyanomethyl ester, piretanide benzyl ester, piretanide morpholinoethyl ester, piretanide 3-(dimethylaminopropyl) ester, piretanide N,N-diethylglycolamide ester, piretanide diethylamide, piretanide dibenzylamide, piretanide benzylltrimethylammonium salt, piretanide cetylltrimethylammonium salt, piretanide N,N-dimethylglycolamide ester, piretanide pivaxetil ester, piretanide propaxetil ester, tetrazolyl-substituted azosemides, pyridinium-substituted torsemide salts (also termed pyridine-substituted torsemide quaternary ammonium salts), as well as similar derivatives of indacrinone, and ozolinone. See previously presented schemes. Moreover, as shown in the previously presented schemes, prodrugs can be formed by attachment of biocompatible polymers, such as those previously described including polyethylene glycol (PEG), to compounds of the present invention using linkages degradable under physiological conditions. See also Schacht, E.H. et al. Poly(ethylene glycol) Chemistry and Biological Applications, American Chemical Society, San Francisco, CA 297-315 (1997). Attachment of PEG to proteins can be employed to reduce immunogenicity and/or extend the half-life of the compounds provided herein. Any conventional PEGylation method can be employed, provided that the PEGylated agent retains pharmaceutical activity.
Compositions of the subject invention are suitable for human and veterinary applications and are preferably delivered as pharmaceutical compositions. Pharmaceutical compositions comprise one or more treatment agents, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and a physiologically acceptable carrier. A pharmaceutically acceptable salt, as used herein, refers to a salt form of a compound permitting its use or formulation as a pharmaceutical and which retains the biological effectiveness of the free acid and base of the specified compound and is not biologically or otherwise undesirable. Examples of such salts are described in Handbook of Pharmaceutical Salts: Properties, Selection, and Use, Wermuth, CG. and Stahl, P. H. (eds.), Wiley-Verlag Helvetica Acta, Zurich, 2002 [ISBN 3-906390-26-8]. Examples of such salts include alkali metal salts and addition salts of free acids and bases. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts, include, but are not limited to, sulfates, pyrosulfates, bisulfates, sulfites, bisulfites, phosphates, monohydrogen-phosphates, dihydrogen phosphates, metaphosphates, pyrophosphates, chlorides, bromides, iodides, acetates, propionates, decanoates, caprylates, acrylates, formates, isobutyrates, caproates, heptanoates, propiolates, oxalates, malonates, succinates, suberates, sebacates, fumarates, maleates, butyne-l,4-dioates, hexyne-l,6-dioates, benzoates, chlorobenzoates, methylbenzoates, dinitrobenzoates, hydroxybenzoates, methoxybenzoates, phthalates, xylenesulfonates, phenylacetates, phenylpropionates, phenylbutyrates, citrates, lactates, γ-hydroxybutyrates, glycollates, tartrates, methanesulfonates, ethane sulfonates, propanesulfonates, toluenesulfonates, naphthalene- 1 -sulfonates, naphthalene-2- sulfonates, and mandelates.
Pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may also contain other compounds, which may be biologically active or inactive. For example, one or more treatment agents of the present invention may be combined with another agent, in a treatment combination, and administered according to a treatment regimen of the present invention. Such combinations may be administered as separate compositions, combined for delivery in a complementary delivery system, or formulated in a combined composition, such as a mixture or a fusion compound. Additionally, the aforementioned treatment combination may include a BBB permeability enhancer and/or a hyperosmotic agent.
The carriers and additives used for such pharmaceutical compositions can take a variety of forms depending on the anticipated mode of administration. Thus, compositions for oral administration may be, for example, solid preparations such as tablets, sugar-coated tablets, hard capsules, soft capsules, granules, powders and the like, with suitable carriers and additives being starches, sugars, binders, diluents, granulating agents, lubricants, disintegrating agents and the like. Because of their ease of use and higher patient compliance, tablets and capsules represent advantageous oral dosage forms for many medical conditions. Similarly, compositions for liquid preparations include solutions, emulsions, dispersions, suspensions, syrups, elixirs, and the like with suitable carriers and additives being water, alcohols, oils, glycols, preservatives, flavoring agents, coloring agents, suspending agents, and the like. Typical preparations for parenteral administration comprise the active ingredient with a carrier such as sterile water or parenterally acceptable oil including polyethylene glycol, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, lecithin, arachis oil or sesame oil, with other additives for aiding solubility or preservation may also be included. In the case of a solution, it can be lyophilized to a powder and then reconstituted immediately prior to use. For dispersions and suspensions, appropriate carriers and additives include aqueous gums, celluloses, silicates or oils. The pharmaceutical compositions according to embodiments of the present invention include those suitable for oral, rectal, topical, nasal, inhalation (e.g., via an aerosol) buccal (e.g., sub-lingual), vaginal, topical (i.e., both skin and mucosal surfaces, including airway surfaces), transdermal administration and parenteral (e.g., subcutaneous, intramuscular, intradermal, intraarticular, intrapleural, intraperitoneal, intrathecal, intracerebral, intracranially, intraarterial, or intravenous), although the most suitable route in any given case will depend on the nature and severity of the condition being treated and on the nature of the particular active agent which is being used. Pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention are particularly suitable for oral, sublingual, parenteral, implantation, nasal and inhalational administration. Compositions for injection will include the active ingredient together with suitable carriers including propylene glycol-alcohol-water, isotonic water, sterile water for injection (USP), emulPhor™-alcohol-water, cremophor-EL™ or other suitable carriers known to those skilled in the art. These carriers may be used alone or in combination with other conventional solubilizing agents such as ethanol, a glycol, or other agents known to those skilled in the art.
Where the compounds of the present invention are to be applied in the form of solutions or injections, the compounds may be used by dissolving or suspending in any conventional diluent. The diluents may include, for example, physiological saline, Ringer's solution, an aqueous glucose solution, an aqueous dextrose solution, an alcohol, a fatty acid ester, glycerol, a glycol, an oil derived from plant or animal sources, a paraffin and the like. These preparations may be prepared according to any conventional method known to those skilled in the art. Compositions for nasal administration may be formulated as aerosols, drops, powders and gels. Aerosol formulations typically comprise a solution or fine suspension of the active ingredient in a physiologically acceptable aqueous or non-aqueous solvent. Such formulations are typically presented in single or multidose quantities in a sterile form in a sealed container. The sealed container can be a cartridge or refill for use with an atomizing device. Alternatively, the sealed container may be a unitary dispensing device such as a single use nasal inhaler, pump atomizer or an aerosol dispenser fitted with a metering valve set to deliver a therapeutically effective amount, which is intended for disposal once the contents have been completely used. When the dosage form comprises an aerosol dispenser, it will contain a propellant such as a compressed gas, air as an example, or an organic propellant including a fluorochlorohydrocarbon or fluorohydrocarbon.
Compositions suitable for buccal or sublingual administration include tablets, lozenges and pastilles, wherein the active ingredient is formulated with a carrier such as sugar and acacia, tragacanth or gelatin and glycerin. Compositions for rectal administration include suppositories containing a conventional suppository base such as cocoa butter.
Compositions suitable for transdermal administration include ointments, gels and patches.
Other compositions known to those skilled in the art can also be applied for percutaneous or subcutaneous administration, such as plasters.
Further, in preparing such pharmaceutical compositions comprising the active ingredient or ingredients in admixture with components necessary for the formulation of the compositions, other conventional pharmacologically acceptable additives may be incorporated, for example, excipients, stabilizers, antiseptics, wetting agents, emulsifying agents, lubricants, sweetening agents, coloring agents, flavoring agents, isotonicity agents, buffering agents, antioxidants and the like. As the additives, there may be mentioned, for example, starch, sucrose, fructose, dextrose, lactose, glucose, mannitol, sorbitol, precipitated calcium carbonate, crystalline cellulose, carboxymethylcellulose, dextrin, gelatin, acacia, EDTA, magnesium stearate, talc, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, sodium metabisulfite, and the like.
In further embodiments, the present invention provides kits including one or more containers comprising pharmaceutical dosage units comprising an effective amount of one or more compounds of the present invention. When aqueous suspensions or elixirs are desired for oral administration, the essential active ingredient therein may be combined with various sweetening or flavoring agents, coloring matter or dyes and, if desired, emulsifying or suspending agents, together with diluents such as water, ethanol, propylene glycol, glycerin and combinations thereof.
The compositions described herein may be administered as part of a sustained release formulation. Such formulations may generally be prepared using well-known technology and administered by, for example, oral, rectal or transdermal delivery systems, or by implantation of a formulation or therapeutic device at one or more desired target site(s). Sustained-release formulations may contain a treatment composition comprising an inventive treatment agent alone, or in combination with a second treatment agent, dispersed in a carrier matrix and/or contained within a reservoir surrounded by a rate controlling membrane. Carriers for use within such formulations are biocompatible, and may also be biodegradable. According to one embodiment, the sustained release formulation provides a relatively constant level of active composition release. According to another embodiment, the sustained release formulation is contained in a device that may be actuated by the subject or medical personnel, upon onset of certain symptoms, for example, to deliver predetermined dosages of the treatment composition. The amount of the treatment composition contained within a sustained release formulation depends upon the site of implantation, the rate and expected duration of release, and the nature of the condition to be treated or prevented. In certain embodiments, compositions of the present invention for treatment of neuropathic pain and neuropsychiatric disorders are administered using a formulation and a route of administration that facilitates delivery of the treatment composition(s) to the central nervous system. Treatment compositions, such as NKCCl antagonists, may be formulated to facilitate crossing of the blood brain barrier as described above, or may be co-administered with an agent that crosses the blood brain barrier. Treatment compositions may be delivered in liposome formulations, for example, that cross the blood brain barrier, or may be co-administered with other compounds, such as bradykinins, bradykinin analogs or derivatives, or other compounds, such as SERAPORT™, that cross the blood brain barrier. Alternatively, treatment compositions of the present invention may be delivered using a spinal tap that places the treatment composition directly in the circulating cerebrospinal fluid. For some treatment conditions, there may be transient or permanent breakdowns of the blood brain barrier and specialized formulation of the treatment composition to cross the blood brain barrier may not be necessary. We have determined, for example, that a bolus iv injection of 20 mg furosemide reduces or abolishes both spontaneous interictal activity and electrical stimulation-evoked epileptiform activity in human patients who are refractory to antiepileptic drugs (AEDs) (Haglund & Hochman J. Neurophysiol. (Feb. 23, 2005) doi: 10.1 152/ jn.00944.2004). Routes and frequency of administration of the therapeutic compositions disclosed herein, as well as dosages, vary according to the indication, and from individual to individual, and may be readily determined by a physician from information that is generally available, and by monitoring patients and adjusting the dosages and treatment regimen accordingly using standard techniques. In general, appropriate dosages and treatment regimen provide the active coinposition(s) in an amount sufficient to provide therapeutic and/or prophylactic benefit. Dosages and treatment regimen may be established by monitoring improved clinical outcomes in treated patients as compared to non-treated patients.
The term "effective amount" or "effective" is intended to designate a dose that causes a ieiicf oe symptoms of a disease or disorder as noted through clinical testing and evaluation, patient observation, and/or the like. "Effective amount" or "effective" fur* her can farther designate a dose that causes a detectable change in biological or chemical activity. The detectable changes1 may be detected and/or further quantified by one skilled in the an for the relevant mechanism or process. ■ Moreover, "effective amount" or '"effective" can designate an amount that, maintains a desired. physiological ..state.. i.e., reduces or prevents significant decline and/or promotes. improvement in the condition of interest. Therapeutically effective dosages and treatment regimen will depend on the condition, the severity of the condition, and the general state of the patient being treated. Since the pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics of the treatment compositions of the present invention vaiy in different patients, a preferred method for determining a therapeutically effective dosage in a patient is to gradually escalate the dosage and moni'or the clinical and laboratory indicia. For combination therapy, the two or more agents are coadministered such that each of the agents is present in a therapeutically effective amount for sufficient time to produce a therapeutic or prophylactic effect. The term "coadministration" is intended to encompass simultaneous or sequential administration of two or more agents in the same formulation or unit dosage form nr in separate formulations. Appropriate dosages and treatment regimen for treatment of acute episodic conditions, chronic conditions, or prophylaxis will necessarily vary to accommodate the condition of the patient.
By way of example, for the treatment to neuropathic pain, furosemide may be administered orally to a patient in amounts of 10-40 mg at a frequency of 1-3 times per day, preferably in an amount of 40 mg three times per day. In an alternative example, bumetanide may be administered orally for the treatment of neuropathic pain in amounts of 1-10 mg at a frequency of 1-3 times per day. One of skill in the art will appreciate that smaller doses may be employed, for example, in pediatric applications.
In further embodiments, bumetanide analogs according to the present invention may be administered in amounts of 1.5 to 6 mg daily, for example 1 tablet or capsule three times a day. In some embodiments, furosemide analogs according to the present invention may be administered in amounts of 60 to 240 mg/day, for example 1 tablet or capsule three times a day. In other embodiments, piretanide analogs according to the present invention may be administered in amounts of 10 to 20 mg daily, for example 1 tablet or capsule once a day. In some embodiments, azosemide analogs according to the present invention may be administered in an amount of 60 mg per day. In other embodiments, torsemide analogs according to the present invention may be administered in amounts of 10 to 20 mg daily, for example 1 tablet or capsule once a day. It should be noted that lower doses may be administered, particularly for IV administration.
Methods and systems of the present invention may also be used to evaluate candidate compounds and treatment regimen for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of neuropathic pain and neuropsychiatric disorders. Various techniques for generating candidate compounds potentially having the desired NKCCl cotransporter antagonist activity may be employed. Candidate compounds may be generated using procedures well known to those skilled in the art of synthetic organic chemistry. Structure-activity relationships and molecular modeling techniques are useful for the purpose of modifying known NKCCl antagonists, such furosemide, bumetanide, ethacrinic acid and related compounds, to confer the desired activities and specificities. Methods for screening candidate compounds for desired activities are described in U.S. Patents 5,902,732, 5,976,825, 6,096,510 and 6,319,682, which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
Candidate compounds may be screened for NKCCl antagonist activity using screening methods of the present invention with various types of cells in culture such as glial cells, neuronal cells, renal cells, and the like, or in situ in animal models. Screening techniques to identify chloride cotransporter antagonist activity, for example, may involve altering the ionic balance of the extracellular space in the tissue culture sample, or in situ in an animal model, by producing a higher than "normal" anionic chloride concentration. The geometrical and/or optical properties of the cell or tissue sample subject to this altered ionic balance are determined, and candidate agents are administered. Following administration of the candidate agents, the corresponding geometrical and/or optical properties of the cell or tissue sample are monitored to determine whether the ionic imbalance remains, or whether the cells responded by altering the ionic balances in the extracellular and intracellular space. If the ionic imbalance remains, the candidate agent is likely a chloride cotransporter antagonist. By screening using various types of cells or tissues, candidate compounds having a high level of glial cell chloride cotransporter antagonist activity and having a reduced level of neuronal cell and renal cell chloride cotransporter antagonist activity may be identified. Similarly, effects on different types of cells and tissue systems may be assessed.
Additionally, the efficacy of candidate compounds may be assessed by simulating or inducing a condition, such as neuropathic pain, in situ in an animal model, monitoring the geometrical and/or optical properties of the cell or tissue sample during stimulation of the condition, administering the candidate compound, then monitoring the geometrical and/or optical properties of the cell or tissue sample following administration of the candidate compound, and comparing the geometrical and/or optical properties of the cell or tissue sample to determine the effect of the candidate compound. Testing the efficacy of treatment compositions for relief of neuropathic pain can be carried using well known methods and animal models, such as that described in Bennett, Hosp. Pract. (Off Ed). 33:95-98, 1998.
As discussed above, compositions for use in the inventive methods may comprise a treatment agent selected from the group consisting of: antibodies, or antigen-binding fragments thereof, that specifically bind to NKCCl ; soluble ligands that bind to NKCCl ; anti-sense oligonucleotides to NKCCl ; and small interfering RNA molecules (siRNA or RNAi) that are specific for NKCCl.
Antibodies that specifically bind to NKCCl are known in the art and include those available from Alpha Diagnostic International, Inc. (San Antonio, TX 78238). An "antigen-binding site," or "antigen-binding fragment" of an antibody refers to the part of the antibody that participates in antigen binding. The antigen binding site is formed by amino acid residues of the N-terminal variable ("V") regions of the heavy ("H") and light ("L") chains. Three highly divergent stretches within the V regions of the heavy and light chains are referred to as "hypervariable regions" which are interposed between more conserved flanking stretches known as "framework regions," or "FRs". Thus the term "FR" refers to amino acid sequences which are naturally found between and adjacent to hypervariable regions in immunoglobulins. In an antibody molecule, the three hypervariable regions of a light chain and the three hypervariable regions of a heavy chain are disposed relative to each other in three dimensional space to form an antigen- binding surface. The antigen-binding surface is complementary to the three-dimensional surface of a bound antigen, and the three hypervariable regions of each of the heavy and light chains are referred to as "complementarity-determining regions," or "CDRs." A number of molecules are known in the art that comprise antigen-binding sites capable of exhibiting the binding properties of an antibody molecule. For example, the proteolytic enzyme papain preferentially cleaves IgG molecules to yield several fragments, two of which (the "F(ab)" fragments) each comprise a covalent heterodimer that includes an intact antigen-binding site. The enzyme pepsin is able to cleave IgG molecules to provide several fragments, including the "F(ab')2" fragment, which comprises both antigen-binding sites. An "Fv" fragment can be produced by preferential proteolytic cleavage of an IgM, IgG or IgA immunoglobulin molecule, but are more commonly derived using recombinant techniques known in the art. The Fv fragment includes a non-covalent VH:: VL heterodimer including an antigen-binding site which retains much of the antigen recognition and binding capabilities of the native antibody molecule (Inbar et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL USA 69:2659-2662, 1972; Hochman et al. Biochem 75:2706-2710, 1976; and Ehrlich et al. Biochem 79:4091-4096, 1980).
Humanized antibodies that specifically bind to NKCCl may also be employed in the inventive methods. A number of humanized antibody molecules comprising an antigen-binding site derived from a non-human immunoglobulin have been described, including chimeric antibodies having rodent V regions and their associated CDRs fused to human constant domains (Winter et al. Nature 349:293-299, 1991 ; Lobuglio et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 8(5:4220-4224, 1989; Shaw et al. J Immunol. /58:4534-4538, 1987; and Brown et al. Cancer Res. 47:3577-3583, 1987); rodent CDRs grafted into a human supporting FR prior to fusion with an appropriate human antibody constant domain (Riechmann et al. Nature 332:323-327, 1988; Verhoeyen et al. Science 239: 1534-1536, 1988; and Jones et al. Nature 527:522-525, 1986); and rodent CDRs supported by recombinantly veneered rodent FRs (European Patent Publication No. 519,596, published Dec. 23, 1992). These "humanized" molecules are designed to minimize unwanted immunological responses towards rodent antihuman antibody molecules which limit the duration and effectiveness of therapeutic applications of those moieties in human recipients.
Modulating the activity of NKCCl may alternatively be accomplished by reducing or inhibiting expression of the polypeptide, which can be achieved by interfering with transcription and/or translation of the corresponding polynucleotide. Polypeptide expression may be inhibited, for example, by introducing anti-sense expression vectors, anti-sense oligodeoxyribonucleotides, anti-sense phosphorothioate oligodeoxy- ribonucleotides, anti-sense oligoribonucleotides or anti-sense phosphorothioate oligoribonucleotides; or by other means well known in the art. All such anti-sense polynucleotides are referred to collectively herein as "anti-sense oligonucleotides".
The anti-sense oligonucleotides for use in the inventive methods are sufficiently complementary to the NKCCl polynucleotide to bind specifically to the polynucleotide. The sequence of an anti-sense oligonucleotide need not be 100% complementary to the of the polynucleotide in order for the anti-sense oligonucleotide to be effective in the inventive methods. Rather an anti-sense oligonucleotide is sufficiently complementary when binding of the anti-sense oligonucleotide to the polynucleotide interferes with the normal function of the polynucleotide to cause a loss of utility, and when non-specific binding of the oligonucleotide to other, non-target sequences is avoided. The design of appropriate anti-sense oligonucleotides is well known in the art. Oligonucleotides that are complementary to the 5' end of the message, for example the 5' untranslated sequence up to and including the AUG initiation codon, should work most efficiently at inhibiting translation. However, oligonucleotides complementary to either the 5'- or 3'-non- translated, non-coding, regions of the targeted polynucleotide may also be employed. Cell permeation and activity of anti-sense oligonucleotides can be enhanced by appropriate chemical modifications, such as the use of phenoxazine-substituted C-5 propynyl uracil oligonucleotides (Flanagan et al., Nat. Biotechnol. 17:48-52, 1999) or T- O-(2-methoxy) ethyl (2'-MOE)-oligonucleotides (Zhang et al, Nat. Biotechnol. 18:862- 867, 2000). The use of techniques involving anti-sense oligonucleotides is well known in the art and is described, for example, in Robinson-Benion et al. {Methods in Enzymol. 254:363-375, 1995) and Kawasaki et al. (Artific. Organs 20:836-848, 1996).
Expression of the NKCCl polypeptide may also be specifically suppressed by methods such as RNA interference (RNAi). A review of this technique is found in Science, 288:1370-1372, 2000. Briefly, traditional methods of gene suppression, employing anti-sense RNA or DNA, operate by binding to the reverse sequence of a gene of interest such that binding interferes with subsequent cellular processes and therefore blocks synthesis of the corresponding protein. RNAi also operates on a post-translational level and is sequence specific, but suppresses gene expression far more efficiently. Exemplary methods for controlling or modifying gene expression are provided in WO 99/49029, WO 99/53050 and WO01/75164, the disclosures of which are hereby incorporated by reference. In these methods, post-transcriptional gene silencing is brought about by a sequence-specific RNA degradation process which results in the rapid degradation of transcripts of sequence-related genes. Studies have shown that double- stranded RNA may act as a mediator of sequence-specific gene silencing (see, for example, Montgomery and Fire, Trends in Genetics, 14:255-258, 1998). Gene constructs that produce transcripts with self-complementary regions are particularly efficient at gene silencing.
It has been demonstrated that one or more ribonucleases specifically bind to and cleave double-stranded RNA into short fragments. The ribonuclease(s) remains associated with these fragments, which in turn specifically bind to complementary mRNA, i.e. specifically bind to the transcribed mRNA strand for the gene of interest. The mRNA for the gene is also degraded- by the ribonuclease(s) into short fragments, thereby obviating translation and expression of the gene. Additionally, an RNA- polymerase may act to facilitate the synthesis of numerous copies of the short fragments,, which exponentially increases the efficiency of the system. A unique feature of RNAi is that silencing is not limited to the cells where it is initiated. The gene-silencing effects may be disseminated to other parts of an organism.
The NKCCl polynucleotide may thus be employed to generate gene silencing constructs and/or gene-specific self-complementary, double-stranded RNA sequences that can be employed in the inventive methods using delivery methods known in the art. A gene construct may be employed to express the self-complementary RNA sequences. Alternatively, cells may be contacted with gene-specific double-stranded RNA molecules, such that the RNA molecules are internalized into the cell cytoplasm to exert a gene silencing effect. The double-stranded RNA must have sufficient homology to the NKCCl gene to mediate RNAi without affecting expression of non-target genes. The double-stranded DNA is at least 20 nucleotides in length, and is preferably 21 -23 nucleotides in length. Preferably, the double-stranded RNA corresponds specifically to a polynucleotide of the present invention. The use of small interfering RNA (siRNA) molecules of 21-23 nucleotides in length to suppress gene expression in mammalian cells is described in WO 01/75164. Tools for designing optimal inhibitory siRNAs include that available from DNAengine Inc. (Seattle, WA).
One RNAi technique employs genetic constructs within which sense and anti- sense sequences are placed in regions flanking an intron sequence in proper splicing orientation with donor and acceptor splicing sites. Alternatively, spacer sequences of various lengths may be employed to separate self-complementary regions of sequence in the construct. During processing of the gene construct transcript, intron sequences are spliced-out, allowing sense and anti-sense sequences, as well as splice junction sequences, to bind forming double-stranded RNA. Select ribonucleases then bind to and cleave the double-stranded RNA, thereby initiating the cascade of events leading to degradation of specific mRNA gene sequences, and silencing specific genes.
For in vivo uses, a genetic construct, anti-sense oligonucleotide or RNA molecule may be administered by various art-recognized procedures (see, e.g., Rolland, Crit. Rev. Therap. Drug Carrier Systems /5: 143-198, 1998, and cited references). Both viral and non-viral delivery methods have been used for gene therapy. Useful viral vectors include, for example, adenovirus, adeno-associated virus (AAV), retrovirus, vaccinia virus and avian poxvirus. Improvements have been made in the efficiency of targeting genes to tumor cells with adenoviral vectors, for example, by coupling adenovirus to DNA- polylysine complexes and by strategies that exploit receptor-mediated endocytosis for selective targeting (see, e.g., Curiel et al., Hum. Gene Ther., 3: 147-154, 1992; and Cristiano & Curiel, Cancer Gene Ther. 3:49-57, 1996). Non-viral methods for delivering polynucleotides are reviewed in Chang & Seymour, (Eds) Curr. Opin. MoI. Ther., vol. 2, 2000. These methods include contacting cells with naked DNA, cationic liposomes, or polyplexes of polynucleotides with cationic polymers and dendrimers for systemic administration (Chang & Seymour, Ibid.). Liposomes can be modified by incorporation of ligands that recognize cell-surface receptors and allow targeting to specific receptors for uptake by receptor-mediated endocytosis (see, for example, Xu et al., MoI. Genet. Metab., 64: 193- 197; 1998; and Xu et al., Hum. Gene Ther., 10:2941 -2952, 1999). Tumor-targeting bacteria, such as Salmonella, are potentially useful for delivering genes to tumors following systemic administration (Low et al., Nat. Biotechnol. 17:27-41 , 1999). Bacteria can be engineered ex vivo to penetrate and to deliver DNA with high efficiency into, for example, mammalian epithelial cells in vivo (see, e.g., Grillot- Courvalin et al., Nat. Biotechnol. 7(5:862-866, 1998). Degradation-stabilized oligonucleotides may be encapsulated into liposomes and delivered to patients by injection either intravenously or directly into a target site (for example, the origin of neuropathic pain). Alternatively, retroviral or adenoviral vectors, or naked DNA expressing anti-sense RNA for the inventive polypeptides, may be administered to patients. Suitable techniques for use in such methods are well known in the art.
The treatment compositions and methods of the present invention have been described, above, with respect to certain preferred embodiments. The Examples set forth below describe the results of specific experiments and are not intended to limit the invention in any fashion.
EXAMPLE 1
Methyl 3-Aminosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4-phenoxybenzoate (Butnetanide Methyl Ester)
To a slurry of bumetanide (1.2g, 3.29mmol) in methanol (12mL) under nitrogen, was added a mixture of thionyl chloride (7OuL) in methanol (6mL) over 5 minutes. After stirring for 5 minutes the reaction mixture became soluble. The reaction was stirred for an additional 30 minutes, at which time the reaction was complete as determined by thin layer chromatography (TLC). The methanol was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was brought up in ethyl acetate and washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate, water and brine. The ethyl acetate was dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate and concentrated to yield l.lg (89%) of methyl 3-aminosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4- phenoxybenzoate as a white solid.
EXAMPLE 2 Cyanomethyl 3-AminosuIfonyl-5-butylamino-4-phenoxybenzoate
(Bumetanide Cyanomethyl Ester)
Bumetanide (l .Og, 2.7mmol) was dissolved in dimethylformamide (DMF) and chloroacetonitrile (195uL, 2.7mmol) was added followed by triethylamine (465uL). The reaction was heated to 1000C for 12 hours, at which time TLC and liquid chromatography-coupled mass spectrometry (LC/MS) indicated the reaction was complete. The reaction was cooled to room temperature, brought up in dichloromethane and washed with water, saturated with ammonium chloride and reduced to a slurry. To the slurry was added water (25mL) and crude product precipitated as an off white solid. Pure cyanomethyl 3-3minosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4-phenoxybenzoate (850mg) was obtained via recrystallization in acetonitrile.
EXAMPLE 3
Benzyl 3-Aminosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4-phenoxybenzoate (Bumetanide Benzyl Ester)
Bumetanide (1.15g, 3.15mmol) was dissolved in dimethylformamide (DMF, 1OmL) and benzyl chloride (40OuL, 2.8mmol) was added followed by triethylamine (48OuL). The reaction was heated to 800C for 12 hours, at which time TLC and LC/MS indicated the reaction was complete. The reaction was cooled to room temperature, brought up in dichloromethane and washed with water, saturated ammonium chloride and concentrated to a thick slurry. To the slurry was added water (25mL). The resultant solids were filtered and dried in a vacuum oven at 500C for 12 hours to yield 1.Og (80%) of benzyl 3-aminosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4-phenoxybenzoate.
EXAMPLE 4
2-(4-Morpholino)ethyl 3-Aminosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4-phenoxybenzoate (Bumetanide Morpholinoethyl Ester)
Bumetanide (1.2g, 3.29mmol) was dissolved in dimethylformamide (DMF, 12mL) and 4-(2-chloroethyl)morpholine hydrochloride (675mg, 3.62mmol) was added followed by triethylamine (ImL) and sodium iodide (500mg 3.33mmol). The reaction was heated to 95°C for 8 hours, at which time TLC and LC/MS indicated the reaction was complete. The reaction was cooled to room temperature brought up in dichloromethane and washed with water, saturated ammonium chloride and concentrated to dryness. After purification via biotage flash chromatography, the purified elute, on evaporation under vacuum, yielded 2-(4-morpholino)ethyl 3-aminosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4-phenoxybenzoate as a white solid (600mg, 62%).
EXAMPLE 5
3-(N,N-DimethvIaminopropyl) 3-Aminosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4-phenoxybenzoate [Bumetanide 3-(DimethylaminopropyD Esterl
In a similar manner to Example 31 , bumetanide can be reacted with 3- (dimethylamino)propyl chloride hydrochloride, triethylamine and sodium iodide in dimethylformamide (DMF) to yield 3-(N,N-dimethylaminopropyl) 3-aminosulfonyl-5- butylamino-4-phenoxybenzoate. EXAMPLE 6
N.N-Diethylaminocarbonylmethyl 3-Aminosulfonyl-5-butylaιnino-4- phenoxybenzoate (Bumetanide N,N-Diethylglycolamide Ester ) Bumetanide (1.2g, 3.29mmol) was dissolved in dimethylformamide (12mL) and
2-chloro-N,N-diethylacetamide (500mg, 3.35mmol) was added followed by triethylamine (0.68mL) and sodium iodide (500mg 3.33mmol). The reaction was heated to 95°C for 8 hours, at which time TLC and LC/MS indicated the reaction was complete. The reaction was cooled to room temperature brought up in dichloromethane and washed with water, saturated ammonium chloride and reduced to a thick slurry. To the slurry was added water (25mL), and the resultant solids precipitated from the solution. The product was filtered and dried in a vacuum oven at 500C for 12 hours to yield l.Og of N,N- diethylaminocarbonylmethyl 3-aminosulfonyl-5-butylarnino-4-phenoxybenzoate.
EXAMPLE 7
N,N-Diethyl 3-Aminosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4-phenoxybenzamide (Bumetanide Diethylamide)
Bumetanide (1.16g, 3.2mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (1OmL) and 1- ethyl-3-(3-dimethylarninopropyl)carbodiimide (EDC, 690mg, 3.6mmol) was added. After 5 minutes N-hydroxybenzotriazole (HOBt, 498mg, 3.6mmol) was added and the solution was stirred for an additional 5 minutes. Diethylamine (332uL, 3.2mmol) was added and the reaction was stirred for 2 hours. The reaction was washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate, water and brine, and dried with magnesium sulfate. The dichloromethane was removed under reduced pressure to yield 860mg (65%) of pure N,N-diethyl 3-aminosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4-phenoxybenzamide.
EXAMPLE 8
N,N-Dibenzyl 3-Aminosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4-phenoxybenzamide (Bumetanide Dibenzylamide) Bumetanide (960mg, 2.6mmol) was dissolved in dimethylformamide (DMF,
1 OmL) and l -ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide (EDC, 560mg, 3.6mmol) was added. After 10 minutes 1 -hydroxybenzotriazole (HOBt, 392mg, 2.9mmol) was added and the solution was stirred for an additional 10 minutes. Dibenzylamine (ImL, 5.2mmol) was added and the reaction was stirred for 2 hours, at which time the reaction was complete by LC/MS. The reaction was poured into saturated ammonium chloride (2OmL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (2x10OmL). The ethyl acetate was washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate, water and brine, and dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate. The ethyl acetate was removed under reduced pressure to yield l.Og (75%) of N,N-dibenzyl 3-aminosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4-phenoxybenzamide as white solid.
EXAMPLE 9
Benzyltrimethylammonium 3-Aminosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4-phenoxybenzoate (Bumetanide Benzylltrimethylammonium Salt)
To a solution of benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide (451mg, 2.7mmol) in water (1OmL) was added bumetanide (Ig, 2.7 mmol) over a period of 5 minutes. The reaction mixture became clear after 10 minutes of stirring. The water was removed under reduced pressure to yield a crude colorless oil. Pure product was obtained from recrystallization of the oil with water and heptane to yield 690mg of benzyltrimethylammonium 3- aminosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4-phenoxybenzoate as light pink crystals.
EXAMPLE 10
Cetyltrimethylammonium 3-Aminosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4-phenoxybenzoate (Bumetanide Cetylltrimethylammonium Salt)
In a similar manner to Example 9, bumetanide can be reacted with cetyltrimethylammonium hydroxide in water to yield cetyltrimethylammonium 3- aminosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4-phenoxybenzoate.
EXAMPLE 11
N,N-Dimethylaiiiinocarbonylinethyl 3-Aminosulfonyl-5-butylainino-4- phenoxybenzoate
(Bumetanide NJV-Dimethylglvcolamide Ester)
Bumetanide (1.2g, 3.29mmol) was dissolved in dimethylformamide (DMF, 1OmL) and 2-chloro-N,N-dimethylamide (41 OuL, 3.9mmol) was added, followed by triethylamine (.7OmL) and sodium iodide (545mg, 3.6mmol). The reaction was heated to 5O0C for 10 hours, at which time TLC and LC/MS indicated the reaction was complete. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate and washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate, water and brine, and dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate. The ethyl acetate was removed under reduced pressure and the product was purified via flash chromatography to yield 685mg (60%) of pure
N,N-dimethylaminocarbonylmethyl 3-aminosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4-phenoxybenzoate.
EXAMPLE 12 t-Butylcarbonyloxymethyl S-Aminosulfonyl-S-butylamino^-phenoxybenzoate (Bumetanide Pivaxetil Ester)
Bumetanide (1.2g, 3.29mmol) was dissolved in dimethylformamide (DMF, 1OmL) and chloromethyl pivalate (575uL, 3.9mmol) was added followed by triethylamine (0.7OmL) and sodium iodide (545mg, 3.6mmol). The reaction was heated to 500C for 10 hours, at which time TLC and LC/MS indicated the reaction was complete. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate and washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate, water and brine, and dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate. The ethyl acetate was removed under reduced pressure and the product was purified via flash chromatography to yield 653mg (60%) of pure t- butylcarbonyloxymethyl 3-aminosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4-phenoxybenzoate.
EXAMPLE 13
Ethylcarbonyloxymethyl 3-Aminosulfonyl-5-butylarnino-4-phenoxybenzoate
(Bumetanide Propaxetil Ester)
In a similar manner to Example 12, bumetanide can be reacted with chloromethyl propionate, triethylamine and sodium iodide in dimethylformamide (DMF) to yield ethylcarbonyloxymethyl 3-aminosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4-phenoxybenzoate.
EXAMPLE 14
Methyl 3-Aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l-pyrroIidinyl)benzoate (Piretanide Methyl Ester)
In a similar manner to Example 1 , piretanide can be reacted with thionyl chloride and methanol to yield methyl 3-aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l -pyrrolidinyl)benzoate.
EXAMPLE 15 Cvanomethyl 3-Aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l-pyrrolidinvDbenzoate
(Piretanide Cyanomethyl Ester)
In a similar manner to Example 2, piretanide can be reacted with chloroacetonitrile in DMF to yield cyanomethyl 3-aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l- pyrrolidinyl)benzoate. EXAMPLE 16
Benzyl 3-Aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l-pyrrolidinyl)benzoate (Piretanide Benzyl Ester)
In a similar manner to Example 3, piretanide can be reacted with benzyl chloride in DMF to yield benzyl 3-aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l -pyrrolidinyl)benzoate.
EXAMPLE 17
2-(4-MorphoHno)ethyl 3-Aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l-pyrrolidinvDbenzoate (Piretanide Morpholinoethyl Ester) In a similar manner to Example 4, piretanide can be reacted with 4-(2- chloroethyl)morpholine hydrochloride, triethylamine and sodium iodide in DMF to yield 2-(4-morpholino)ethyl 3-aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l-pyrrolidinyl)benzoate.
EXAMPLE 18 3-(N,N-Dimethylaminopropyl 3-Aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l- pyrrolidinvDbenzoate fPiretanide 3-(DimethylaminopropyD Esterl
In a similar manner to Example 31 , piretanide can be reacted with 3- (dimethylamino)propyl chloride hydrochloride, triethylamine and sodium iodide in dimethylformamide (DMF) to yield 3-(N,N-dimethylaminopropyl 3-aminosulfonyl-4- phenoxy-5-(l -pyrrolidinyl)benzoate.
EXAMPLE 19
N,N-Diethylaminocarbonylmethyl 3-Aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5- (1-pyrrolidinvDbenzoate
(Piretanide N,N-Diethylglycolamide Ester)
In a similar manner to Example 6, piretanide can be reacted with 2-chloro-N,N- diethylacetamide, triethylamine and sodium iodide in dimethylformamide (DMF) to yield N,N-diethylaminocarbony lmethyl 3-aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)- benzoate. EXAMPLE 20
N,N-Diethyl 3-Aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l-pyrrolidinyl)benzoate (Piretanide Diethylamide)
In a similar manner to Example 7, piretanide can be reacted with EDC, HOBt and diethylamine in DMF to yield N,N-diethyl 3-aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l- pyrrolidinyl)-benzamide.
EXAMPLE 21
N,N-Dibenzyl 3-Aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l-pyrrolidinvDbenzoate (Piretanide Dibenzylamide) In a similar manner to Example 8, piretanide can be reacted with EDC, HOBt and dibenzylamine in DMF to yield N,N-dibenzyl 3-aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l- pyrrolidinyl) benzamide.
EXAMPLE 22 Benzyltrimethylammonium 3-Aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l-pyrrolidinv0benzoate
(Piretanide Benzylltrimethylammonium Salt)
In a similar manner to Example 9, piretanide can be reacted with benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide to yield benzyltrimethylammonium 3- aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)benzoate.
EXAMPLE 23 Cetyltrimethylammonium 3-AminosulfonvI-4-phenoxy-5-(l-pyrrolidinvDbenzoate
(Piretanide Cetylltrimethylammonium Salt)
In a similar manner to Example 10, piretanide can be reacted with cetyltrimethylammonium hydroxide in water to yield cetyltrimethylammonium 3- aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l-pyrrolidinyl)benzoate.
EXAMPLE 24
N,N-Dimethylaminocarbonylmethyl 3-Aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l-pyrrolidinyl)- benzoate (Piretanide N,N-Dimethylglvcolamide Ester)
In a similar manner to Example 1 1, piretanide can be reacted with 2-chloro-N,N dimethylacetamide, triethylamine and sodium iodide in DMF to yield N5N- dimethylaminocarbonylmethyl 3-aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)benzoate.
EXAMPLE 25 t-ButylcarbonyloxytnethvI 3-Aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l-pyrrolidinvnbenzoate (Piretanide Pivaxetil Ester)
In a similar manner to Example 12, piretanide can be reacted with chloromethyl pivalate, triethylamine and sodium iodide in DMF to yieldj-butylcarbonyloxymethyl 3- aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)benzoate.
EXAMPLE 26
Ethylcarbonyloxymethyl 3-Aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l-pyrrolidinyl)benzoate
(Piretanide Propaxetil Ester)
In a similar manner to Example 13, piretanide can be reacted with chloromethyl propionate, triethylamine and sodium iodide in DMF to yield ethylcarbonyloxymethyl 3- aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-( 1 -pyrrolidinyl)benzoate.
EXAMPLE 27
Ethyl 5-Aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-f(2-furanylmethyl)anιino1benzoate (Furosemide Ethyl Ester) The method of Bundgaard, H., Norgaard, T. and Nielsen, N. M., Int. J.
Pharmaceutics, 1988, 42, 217-224, can be employed to prepare ethyl 5-aminosulfonyl-4- chloro-2-[(2-furanylmethyl)amino]benzoate, m.p. 163 - 165°.
EXAMPLE 28 Cvanomethyl 5-Aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2-furanylmethyl)aminolbenzoate
(Furosemide Cyanomethyl Ester)
In a similar manner to Example 2, furosemide can be reacted with chloroacetonitrile in DMF to yield cyanomethyl 5-aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2- furanylrnethyl)amino]-benzoate. EXAMPLE 29
Benzyl 5-Arninosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-f(2-furanylinethvI)aminolbenzoate (Furosemide Benzyl Ester)
In a similar manner to Example 3, furosemide can be reacted with benzyl chloride in DMF to yield benzyl 5-aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2-furanylmethyl)amino]benzoate.
EXAMPLE 30 2-(4-Morpholino)ethyl 5-AminosuIfonyl-4-chIoro-2-f(2- furanylmethvQaminolbenzoate (Furosemide Morpholinoethyl Ester) The method of Mork, N., Bundgaard, H., Shalmi, M. and Christensen, S., Int. J.
Pharmaceutics, 1990, 60, 163-169, can be employed to prepare 2-(4-morpholino)ethyl 5- aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2-furanylmethyl)amino]benzoate, m.p. 134 - 135°.
EXAMPLE 31 3-(N,N-Dimethylaminopropyl 5-AminosuIfonyl-4-chIoro-2-[(2- furanylmethyDaminolbenzoate (Furosemide 3-(Dimethylaminopropyl) Ester)
The method of Mork, N., Bundgaard, H., Shalmi, M. and Christensen, S., Int. J. Pharmaceutics, 1990, 60, 163- 169, can be employed to prepare 3-(N,N- dimethylaminopropyl 5-aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2-furanylmethyl)amino]benzoate, m.p. 212 - 213°.
EXAMPLE 32
N,N-Diethylaminocarbonylmethyl 5-AminosuIfonyl-4-chloro-2-f(2- furanylmethvDaminolbenzoate
(Furosemide NJV-Diethylglycolamide Ester)
The method of Mork, N., Bundgaard, H., Shalmi, M. and Christensen, S., Int. J. Pharmaceutics, 1990, 60, 163-169, can be employed to prepare N,N-diethyl- aminocarbonylmethyl 5-aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2-furanylmethyl)amino]benzoate, m.p. 135 - 136°. EXAMPLE 33
N,N-Diethyl 5-Aminosulfonyl-4-chIoro-2-f(2-furanylιnethvπaminolbenzamide
(Furosemide Diethylamide)
In a similar manner to Example 7, furosemide can be reacted with EDC, HOBt and diethylamine in DMF to yield N,N-diethyl 5-aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2- furany lmethy l)-amino]benzamide.
EXAMPLE 34
N,N-Dibenzyl 5-Aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2-furanylmethvDaminolbenzamide
(Furosemide Dibenzylamide) In similar manner to Example 8, furosemide can be reacted with EDC, HOBt and dibenzylamine in DMF to yield N,N-dibenzyl 5-aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2- furanylmethyl)amino]benzamide.
EXAMPLE 35 Benzyltrimethylammonium 5-Aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2- furanylmethvDaminolbenzoate (Furosemide Benzyltrimethylammonium Salt)
In similar manner to Example 9, furosemide can be reacted with benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide to yield benzyltrimethylammonium 5- aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2-furanylmethyl)amino]benzoate.
EXAMPLE 36 Cetyltrimethylammonium 5-Aminosulfonyl-4-chIoro-2-K2- furanylmethvDaminolbenzoate (Furosemide Cetyltrimethylammonium Salt)
In similar manner to Example 10, furosemide can be reacted with cetyltrimethylammonium hydroxide in water to yield cetyltrimethylammonium 5- aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2-furanylmethyl)amino]benzoate.
EXAMPLE 37
N,N-Dimethylaminocarbonylmethyl 5-Aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2- furanylmethvQaminolbenzoate (Furosemide N,N-Dimethylglvcolamide Ester)
The method of Bundgaard, H., Norgaard, T. and Nielsen, N. M., Int. J. Pharmaceutics, 1988, 42, 217-224, can be employed to prepare N ,N- dimethylaminocarbonylmethyl 5-aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2-furanylmethyl)amino]- benzoate, m.p. 193 - 194°.
EXAMPLE 38 t-Butylcarbonyloxymethyl 5-Aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2- furanylmethvDaminolbenzoate
(Furosemide Pivaxetil Ester)
The method of Mork, N., Bundgaard, H., Shalmi, M. and Christensen, S., Int. J. Pharmaceutics, 1990, 60, 163-169, can be employed to prepare t-butylcarbonyloxymethyl 5-aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2-furanylrnethyl)amino]benzoate.
EXAMPLE 39
Ethylcarbonyloxymethyl 5-Aminosulfonyl-4-chIoro-2-f(2- furanylmethvOaminolbenzoate (Furosemide Propaxetil Ester) The method of Mork, N., Bundgaard, H., Shalmi, M. and Christensen, S., Int. J.
Pharmaceutics, 1990, 60, 163-169, can be employed to prepare ethylcarbonyloxymethyl 5-aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2-furanylmethyl)amino]benzoate, m.p. 141 - 142°.
EXAMPLE 40 5-fl-(t-Butylcarbonyloxymethyl)-lH-tetrazol-5-vπ-2-chloro-4-[(2- thienylmethvDaminolbenzenesulfonamide (Tetrazolyl-Substituted Azosemide)
In a similar manner to Example 12, azosemide can be reacted with chloromethyl pivalate, triethylamine and sodium iodide in DMF to yield 5-[l-(t- Butylcarbonyloxymethyl)-lH-tetrazol-5-yl]-2-chloro~4-[(2- thienylmethyl)amino]benzenesulfonamide.
EXAMPLE 41
2-Chloro-5-fl-(ethylcarbonyloxymethyl)-lH-tetrazol-5-yll-4-r(2- thienylmethyl)amino|benzenesulfonamide
(Tetrazolyl-Substituted Azosemide)
In similar manner to Example 12, azosemide can be reacted with chloromethyl propionate, triethylamine and sodium iodide in DMF to yield 2-chloro-5-[l- (ethylcarbonyloxymethyl)-lH-tetrazol-5-yl]-4-[(2- thienylmethyl)amino]benzenesulfonamide. EXAMPLE 42
2-Chloro-5-fl-(hvdroxymethyl)-lH-tetrazol-5-yll-4-K2- thienylmethvDaminolbenzenesulfonamide
(Tetrazolyl-Substituted Azosemide) Azosemide can be reacted with formaldehyde in methylene chloride, methylene chloride-DMF mixtures or DMF to yield 2-chloro-5-[l-(hydroxymethyl)-lH-tetrazol-5- yl]-4-[(2-thienylmethyl)amino]benzenesulfonamide.
EXAMPLE 43 2-Chloro-5-H-(methoxymethvn-lH-tetrazol-5-yll-4-f(2- thienylmethvPaminolbenzenesulfonamide (Tetrazolyl-Substituted Azosemide)
Azosemide can be reacted with formaldehyde and methanol in methylene chloride, methylene chloride-DMF mixtures or DMF to yield 2-chloro-5-[l- (methoxymethyl)- 1 H-tetrazol-5-yl]-4-[(2-thienylmethyl)amino]benzenesulfonamide.
EXAMPLE 44 2-Chloro-5-H-(methylthiomethvn-lH-tetrazol-5-yll-4-ϊ(2- thienylmethvDaminolbenzenesulfonamide (Tetrazolyl-Substituted Azosemide)
Azosemide can be reacted with formaldehyde and methanethiol in methylene chloride, methylene chloride-DMF mixtures or DMF to yield 2-chloro-5-[l- (methylthiomethyl)-lH-tetrazol-5-yl]-4-[(2-thienylmethyl)amino]benzenesulfonamide.
EXAMPLE 45
5-[l-(Benzyloxymethyl)-1 H-tetrazol-5-yll- 2-chloro-4-[f2- thienylmethvPaminoibenzenesulfonamide
(Tetrazolyl-Substituted Azosemide)
Azosemide can be reacted with benzyl chloromethyl ether, triethylamine and sodium iodide in DMF to yield 5-[l -(benzyloxymethyl)-lH-tetrazol-5-yl]- 2-chloro-4-[(2- thienylmethyl)amino]benzenesulfonamide. EXAMPLE 46
Benzyltrimethylammonium Salt of 2-Chloro-5-f lH-tetrazol-5-vD-4-f(2- thienylmethyl)amino|benzenesulfonamide (Azosemide Benzyltrimethylammonium Salt)
In similar manner to Example 9, azosemide can be reacted with benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide in water to yield the benzyltrimethylammonium salt of 2-chloro-5-(lH-tetrazol-5-yl)-4-[(2-thienylmethyl)amino]benzenesulfonamide.
EXAMPLE 47
Cetyltrimethylammonium Salt of 2-Chloro-5-(lH-tetrazol-5-vn-4-[(2- thienylmethvDaminolbenzenesulfonamide
(Azosemide Cetyltrimethylammonium Salt)
In similar manner to Example 9, azosemide can be reacted with cetyltrimethylammonium hydroxide in water to yield the cetyltrimethylammonium salt of 2-chloro-5-(lH-tetrazol-5-yl)-4-[(2-thienylmethyl)amino]benzenesulfonamide.
EXAMPLE 48
S-Isopropylcarbamylsulfonamido^-P'-methylphenyPaminopyridiniuin t-
Butylcarbonyloxymethochloride (Pyridinium-Substituted Torsemide Salt) In similar manner to Example 12, torsemide can be reacted with chloromethyl pivalate, triethylamine and sodium iodide in DMF to yield 3- isopropylcarbamylsulfonamido-4-(3 ' -methylpheny l)aminopyridinium t- butylcarbonyloxymethochloride and some 3-isopropylcarbamylsulfonamido-4-(3'- methylphenyl)aminopyridinium t-butylcarbonyloxy-methoiodide.
EXAMPLE 49
3-Isopropylcarbamylsulfonamido-4-(3'-methylphenyl)aminopyridiniuπi
Ethylcarbonyloxymethochloride (Pyridinium-Substituted Torsemide Salt) In similar manner to Example 12, torsemide can be reacted with chloromethyl propionate, triethylamine and sodium iodide in DMF to yield 3- isopropylcarbamylsulfonamido-4-(3'-methylphenyl)arninopyridinium ethylcarbonyloxymethochloride and some 3-isopropylcarbamylsulfonamido-4-(3'-methylphenyl)- aminopyridinium ethylcarbonyloxymethoiodide. EXAMPLE 50
3-Isopropylcarbamylsulfonamido-4-(3'-methylphenyl)aminopyridinium benzyloxymethochloride (Pyridinium-Substituted Torsemide Salt) In a similar manner to Example 3, torsemide can be reacted with benzyl chloromethyl ether and triethylamine in DMF to yield 3-isopropylcarbamylsulfonamido- 4-(3 '-methylphenyl)aminopyridinium benzyloxymethochloride.
EXAMPLE 51 3-Isopropylcarbamylsulfonamido-4-(3'-methvIphenvDaminopyridinium methoxymethochloride (Pyridinium-Substituted Torsemide Salt)
In a similar manner to Example 3, torsemide can be reacted with methyl chloromethyl ether and triethylamine and in DMF to yield 3- isopropylcarbamylsulfonamido-4-(3 ' -methylpheny l)aminopyridinium methoxymethochloride.
EXAMPLE 52
3-Isopropylcarbamylsιιlfonamido-4-(3'-methylphenyl)aminopyridinium phenylmetliochloride
(Pyridinium-Substituted Torsemide Salt)
In a similar manner to Example 3, torsemide can be reacted with benzyl chloride and triethylamine in DMF to yield 3-isopropylcarbamylsulfbnamido-4-(3'- methylphenyl)-aminopyridinium phenylmethochloride.
EXAMPLE 53 3-Tsopropylcarbamylsulfonamido-4-(3'-methylphenyl)aminopyridinium
Benzylthiomethochloride (Pyridinium-Substituted Torsemide Salt) In a similar manner to Example 3, torsemide can be reacted with benzyl chloromethyl thioether and triethylamine in DMF to yield 3- isopropylcarbamylsulfonamido-4-(3'-methylphenyl)aminopyridinium benzylthiamethochloride. EXAMPLE 54
3-Isopropylcarbamylsulfonamido-4-(3'-methylphenv0aminopyridinium
Methylthiomethochloride (Pyridinium-Substituted Torsemide Salt)
In a similar manner to Example 3, torsemide can be reacted with methyl chloromethyl thioether and triethylamine and in DMF to yield 3- isopropylcarbamylsulfonamido-4-(3'-methylphenyl)aminopyridinium methylthiametho- chloride.
EXAMPLE 55
Methoxy(polvethyleneoxy)n.ι-ethyl 3-AminosuIfonyl-5-butylamino-4- phenoxybenzoate (Bumetanide mPEG350 Esters)
In a manner similar to Example 3, bumetanide can be reacted with MeO-PEG350- Cl (Biolink Life Sciences, Inc., Cary, NC, BLS-106-350) and triethylamine in DMF to yield methoxy(polyethyleneoxy)π-ι -ethyl 3-aminosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4- phenoxybenzoate where n is in the 7-8 range.
EXAMPLE 56
Methoxy(polvethyleneoxy)n-i-ethyl 3-AminosulfonvI-5-butylamino-4- phenoxybenzoate (Bumetanide mPEGlOOO Esters)
In a manner similar to Example 3, bumetanide can be reacted with MeO- PEGIOOO-OTs (Biolink Life Sciences, Inc., Cary, NC, BLS-107-1000) and triethylamine in DMF to yield methoxy(polyethyleneoxy)n-i -ethyl 3-aminosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4- phenoxybenzoate where n is in the 19-24 range.
EXAMPLE 57 Methoxy(polvethyleneoxy)n-ι-ethyl 3-Aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l- pyrrolidinvDbenzoate (Piretanide mPEG350 Esters)
In similar manner to Example 3, piretanide can be reacted with MeO-PEG350-Cl (Biolink Life Sciences, Inc., Cary, NC, BLS-106-350) and triethylamine in DMF to yield methoxy(polyethyleneoxy)n-i -ethyl 3-aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l-pyrrolidinyl)- benzoate where n is in the 7-8 range. EXAMPLE 58
Methoxy(polvethyleneoxy)n-i-ethyl 3-Aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-fl- pyrrolidinvDbenzoate (Piretanide mPEGlOOO Esters')
In similar manner to Example 3, piretanide can be reacted with MeO-PEGlOOO- OTs (Biolink Life Sciences, Inc., Cary, NC, BLS-107-1000) and triethylamine in DMF to yield methoxy(polyethyleneoxy)n-ι -ethyl 3-aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l-pyrrolidinyl)- benzoate where n is in the 19-24 range.
EXAMPLE 59
Methoxy(polvethyleneoxy')n-i-ethyl 5-Aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2- furanylmethvDaminolbenzoate (Furosemide mPEG350 Esters)
In similar manner to Example 3, furosemide can be reacted with MeO-P EG350-Cl (Biolink Life Sciences, Inc., Cary, NC, BLS-106-350) and triethylamine in DMF to yield methoxy(polyethyleneoxy)n-i -ethyl 5-aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2-furanylmethyl)- amino]-benzoate where n is in the 7-8 range.
EXAMPLE 60 Methoxy(polvethyleneoxy)n:Li-ethyl 5-Aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2- furanylmethvDaminolbenzoate (Furosemide mPEGlOOO Esters) In similar manner to Example 3, furosemide can be reacted with MeO-PEGlOOO- OTs (Biolink Life Sciences, Inc., Cary, NC, BLS-107-1000) and triethylamine in DMF to yield methoxy(polyethyleneoxy)n.| -ethyl 5-aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2-furanylmethyl)- amino]-benzoate where n is in the 19-24 range.
EXAMPLE 61 5-[l-[Methoxy(polvethvIeneoxy)n,ι-ethyll-lH-tetrazol-5-yll-2-chloro-4-ff2- thienylmethvDaminolbenzenesulfonamides (N-mPEG350-Tetrazolyl-Substituted Azosemides)
In similar manner to Example 3, azosemide can be reacted with MeO-PEG350-Cl (Biolink Life Sciences, Inc., Cary, NC, BLS- 106-350) and triethylamine in DMF to yield 5-[l-[methoxy(polyethyleneoxy)n.i-ethyl]-lH-tetrazol-5-yl]-2-chloro-4-[(2- thienylmethyl)-amino]benzenesulfonamides where n is in the 7-8 range. EXAMPLE 62
5-[l-fMethoxy(polvethyleneoxy)n-ι-ethyll-lH-tetrazol-5-yll-2-chloro-4-rf2- thienylmethvPaminolbenzenesulfonamides QSf-mPEGlOOO-Tetrazolyl-Substituted Azosemides)
In similar manner to Example 3, azosemide can be reacted with MeO-PEGlOOO- OTs (Biolink Life Sciences, Inc., Cary, NC, BLS- 107- 1000) and triethylamine in DMF to yield 5-[l -[methoxy(polyethyleneoxy)n.i-ethyl]-lH-tetrazol-5-yl]-2-chloro-4-[(2- thienylmethyl)-amino]benzenesulfonamides where n is in the 19-24 range.
EXAMPLE 63 3-Isopropylcarbamylsulfonaιnido-4-(3'-methylphenvI)aminopyridinium
Methoxy(polvethyleneoxy)n.i-ethochlorides (N-mPEG350-Pyridinium Torsemide Salts)
In similar manner to Example 3, torsemide can be reacted with MeO-PEG350-Cl (Biolink Life Sciences, Inc., Cary, NC, BLS- 106-350) and triethylamine in DMF to yield 3-isopropylcarbamylsulfonamido-4-(3'-methylphenyl)aminopyridinium methoxy(polyethyleneoxy)n-i-ethochlorides where n is in the 7-8 range.
EXAMPLE 64
3-Isopropylcarbamylsulfonamido-4-(3'-methylphenyl)aminopyridiniuιn MethoxyfpolvethyleneoxyVi-ethochlorides
(N-mPEG1000-Pyridinium Torsemide Salts)
In similar manner to Example 3, torsemide can be reacted with MeO-PEGlOOO- OTs (Biolink Life Sciences, Inc., Cary, NC, BLS- 107- 1000) and triethylamine in DMF to yield 3-isopropylcarbamylsulfonamido-4-(3 '-methylphenyl)aminopyridinium methoxy- (polyethyleneoxy)n-i-ethochlorides where n is in the 19-24 range.
EXAMPLE 65 3-Aminosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4-phenoxybenza)dehyde (Bumetanide Aldehyde)
By the method of Muraki and Mukiayama {Chem. Letters, 1974, 1447 and Chem. Letters, 1975, 215), bumetanide can be reacted with bis(4-methylpiperazinyl)aluminum hydride to yield 3-aminosulfonyl-5-butylamino-4-phenoxybenzaldehyde. EXAMPLE 66
3-AminosulfonvI-4-phenoxy-5-(l-pyrrolidinv0benzaldehvde (Piretanide Aldehyde)
By the method of Muraki and Mukiayama (Chem. Letters, 1974, 1447 and Chem. Letters, 1975, 215), piretanide can be reacted with bis(4-methylpiperazinyl)aluminum hydride to yield 3-aminosulfonyl-4-phenoxy-5-(l-pyrrolidinyl)benzaldehyde.
EXAMPLE 67
5-Aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-f(2-furanylmethvDaminolbenzaldehvde (Furosemide Aldehyde) By the method of Muraki and Mukiayama (Chem. Letters, 1974, 1447 and Chem.
Letters, 1975, 215), furosemide can be reacted with bis(4-methylpiperazinyl)aluminum hydride to yield 5-aminosulfonyl-4-chloro-2-[(2-furanylmethyl)amino]benzaldehyde.
EXAMPLE 68 The Effects of Furosemide on Epileptiform Discharges in Hippocampal Slices
During these studies, spontaneous epileptiform activity was elicited by a variety of treatments. Sprague-Dawley rats (males and females; 25-35 days old) were decapitated, the top of the skull was rapidly removed, and the brain chilled with ice-cold oxygenated slicing medium. The slicing medium was a sucrose-based artificial cerebrospinal fluid (sACSF) consisting of 220 mM sucrose, 3 mM KCI, 1.25 mM NaH2PO4, 2 mM MgSO4, 26 mM NaHCO3, 2 mM CaCl2, and 10 mM dextrose (295-305 mOsm). A hemisphere of brain containing hippocampus was blocked and glued (cyanoacrylic adhesive) to the stage of a Vibroslicer (Frederick Haer, Brunsick, ME). Horizontal or transverse slices 400 μm thick were cut in 4° C, oxygenated (95% O2; 5% CO2) slicing medium. The slices were immediately transferred to a holding chamber where they remained submerged in oxygenated bathing medium (ACSF) consisting of 124 mM NaCl, 3 mM KCl, 1.25 mM NaH2PO4, 2 mM MgSO4, 26 mM NaHCO3, 2 mM CaCl2, and 10 mM dextrose (295-305 mOsm). The slices were held at room temperature for at least 45 minutes before being transferred to a submersion-style recording chamber (all other experiments). In the recording chamber, the slices were perfused with oxygenated recording medium at 34-35° C. All animal procedures were conducted in accordance with NIH and University of Washington animal care guidelines. In most slice experiments, simultaneous extracellular field electrode recordings were obtained from CAl and CA3 areas. A bipolar tungsten stimulating electrode was placed on the Schaffer collaterals to evoke synaptically-driven field responses in CAl . Stimuli consisted of 100-300 μsec duration pulses at an intensity of four times the population-spike threshold. After discharges were evoked by a 2 second train of such stimuli delivered at 60 Hz. Spontaneous interictal-like bursts were observed in slices treated by the following modifications or additions to the bathing medium: 10 mM potassium (6 slices; 4 animals; average - 81 bursts/min.); 200-300 μM 4-aminopyridine (4 slices; 2 animals; average - 33 burst/min.); 50-100 μM bicuculline (4 slices; 3 animals; average - 14 bursts/min); M Mg++ (1 hour of perfusion - 3 slices; 2 animals; average - 20 bursts/min. or 3 hours of perfusion - 2 slices; 2 animals); zero calcium/6 mM KCI and 2 mM EGTA (4 slices; 3 animals). In all treatments, furosemide was added to the recording medium once a consistent level of bursting was established.
In the first of these procedures, episodes of after discharges were evoked by electrical stimulation of the Schaffer collaterals (Stasheff et al., Brain Res. 344:296, 1985) and the extracellular field response was monitored in the CAl pyramidal cell region (13 slices; 8 animals). The concentration of Mg++ in the bathing medium was reduced to 0.9 mM and after discharges were evoked by stimulation at 60 Hz for 2 seconds at an intensity 4 times the population spike threshold (population spike threshold intensity varied between 20-150 μA at 100-300 μsec pulse duration). The tissue was allowed to recover for 10 minutes between stimulation trials. In each experiment, the initial response of CAl to synaptic input was first tested by recording the field potential evoked by a single stimulus pulse. In the control condition, Schaffer collateral stimulation evoked a single population spike (Fig. IA, inset). Tetanic stimulation evoked approximately 30 seconds after discharge (Fig. IA, left) associated with a large change in intrinsic signal (Fig. IA, right).
For imaging of intrinsic optical signals, the tissue was placed in a perfusion chamber located on the stage of an upright microscope and illuminated with a beam of white light (tungsten filament light and lens system; Dedo Inc.) directed through the microscope condenser. The light was controlled and regulated (power supply - Lamda Inc.) to minimize fluctuations and filtered (695 nm longpass) so that the slice was transilluminated with long wavelengths (red). Field of view and magnification were determined by the choice of microscope objectives (4X for monitoring the entire slice). Image-frames were acquired with a charge-coupled device (CCD) camera (Dage MTI Inc.) at 30 HZ and were digitized at 8 bits with a spatial resolution of 512 x 480 pixels using an Imaging Technology Inc. Series 151 imaging system; gains and offsets of the camera-control box and the A/D board were adjusted to optimize the sensitivity of the system. Imaging hardware was controlled by a 486-PC compatible computer. To increase signal/noise, an averaged-image was composed from 16 individual image- frames, integrated over 0.5 sec and averaged together. An experimental series typically involved the continuous acquisition of a series of averaged-images over a several minute time period; at least 10 of these averaged-images were acquired as control-images prior o stimulation. Pseudocolored images were calculated by subtracting the first control-image from subsequently acquired images and assigning a color lookup table to the pixel values. For these images, usually a linear low-pass filter was used to remove high frequency noise and a linear-histogram stretch was used to map the pixel values over the dynamic range of the system. All operations on these images were linear so that quantitative information was preserved. Noise was defined as the maximum standard deviation of fluctuations of AR/R of the sequence of control images within a given acquisition series, where AR/R represented the magnitude of the change in light-transmission through the tissue. Delta R/R was calculated by taking all the difference-images and dividing by the first control image: (subsequent image - first-control-image)/first-control-image. The noise was always <0.01 for each of the chosen image sequences. The absolute change in light transmission through the tissue was estimated during some experiments by acquiring images after placing neutral density filters between the camera and the light source. On average, the camera electronics and imaging system electronics amplified the signal 10- fold prior to digitization so that the peak absolute changes in light transmission through the tissue were usually between 1 % and 2%.
The gray-scale photo shown in Fig. ID is a video image of a typical hippocampal slice in the recording chamber. The fine gold-wire mesh that was used to hold the tissue in place can be seen as dark lines running diagonally across the slice. A stimulating electrode can be seen in the upper right on the stratum radiatum of CAl . The recording electrode (too thin to be seen in the photo) was inserted at the point indicated by the white arrow. Fig. IA illustrates that two seconds of stimulation at 60 Hz elicited after discharge activity and shows a typical after discharge episode recorded by the extracellular electrode. The inset of Fig. IA shows the CAl field response to a single 200 sec test pulse (artifact at arrow) delivered to the Schaffer collaterals. Fig. IAl shows a map of the peak change in optical transmission through the tissue evoked by Schaffer collateral stimulation. The region of maximum optical change corresponds to the apical and basal dendritic regions of CAl on either side of the stimulating electrode. Fig. IB illustrates sample traces showing responses to stimulation after 20 minutes of perfusion with medium containing 2.5 mM furosemide. Both the electrical after discharge activity (shown in Fig. IB) and the stimulation-evoked optical changes (shown in Fig. IBl) were blocked. However, there was a hyper-excitable field response (multiple population spikes) to the test pulse (inset). Figs 1C and ICl illustrate that restoration of initial response patterns was seen after 45 minutes of perfusion with normal bathing medium.
The opposing effects of furosemide-blockade of the stimulation-evoked after discharges and a concomitant increase of the synaptic response to a test-pulse illustrate the two key results: (1) furosemide blocked epileptiform activity, and (2) synchronization (as reflected by spontaneous epileptiform activity) and excitability (as reflected by the response to a single synaptic input) were dissociated. Experiments in which the dose- dependency of furosemide was examined determined that a minimum concentration of 1.25 mM was required to block both the after discharges and optical changes.
EXAMPLE 69 The effects of furosemide on epileptiform discharges in hippocampal slices perfused with high-K"1" (10 mM) bathing medium Rat hippocampal slices, prepared as described above, were perfused with a high- K+ solution until extended periods of spontaneous interictal-like bursting were recorded simultaneously in C A3 (top traces) and CAl (lower traces) pyramidal cell regions (Figs. 2A and 2B). After 15 minutes of perfusion with furosemide-containing medium (2.5 mM furosemide), the burst discharges increased in magnitude (Figs. 2C and 2D). However, after 45 minutes of furosemide perfusion, the bursts were blocked in a reversible manner (Figs 2E, 2F, 2G and 2H). During this entire sequence of furosemide perfusion, the synaptic response to a single test pulse delivered to the Schaffer colalterals was either unchanged or enhanced (data not shown). It is possible that the initial increase in discharge amplitude reflected a furosemide-induced decrease in inhibition (Misgeld et al., Science 232: 1413, 1986; Thompson et al., /. Neurophysiol. 60: 105, 1988; Thompson and Gahwiler, J. Neuropysiol. 61 :512, 1989; and Pearce, Neuron 10: 189, 1993). It has previously been reported (Pearce, Neuron 10: 189, 1993) that furosemide blocks a component of the inhibitory currents in hippocampal slices with a latency (<15 min.) similar to the time to onset of the increased excitability observed here. The longer latency required for the furosemide-block of the spontaneous bursting might correspond to additional time required for a sufficient block of the furosemide-sensitive cellular volume regulation mechanisms under high-K+ conditions.
After testing the effects of furosemide on slices perfused with high-K+, similar studies were performed with a variety of other commonly studied in vitro models of epileptiform discharge (Galvan et al., Brain Res. 241 :75, 1982; Schwartzkroin and Prince, Brain Res.183:61, 1980; Anderson et al., Brain Res. 398:215, 1986; and Zhang et al., Epilepsy Res. 20: 105, 1995). After prolonged exposure (2-3 hours) to magnesium- free medium (0-Mg++), slices have been shown to develop epileptiform discharges that are resistant to common clinically used anticonvulsant drugs (Zhang et al., Epilepsy Res. 20: 105, 1995). Recordings from entorhinal cortex (Fig. 21) and subiculum (not shown) showed that after 3 hours of perfusion with 0-Mg+* medium, slices developed bursting patterns that appeared similar to these previously described "anticonvulsant resistant" bursts. One hour after the addition of furosemide to the bathing medium, these bursts were blocked (Fig. 2J). Furosemide also blocked spontaneous burst discharges observed with the following additions/modifications to the bathing medium: (1) addition of 200- 300 μM 4-aminopyridine (4-AP; a potassium channel blocker) (Figs. 2K and 2L); (2) addition of the GABA antagonist, bicuculline, at 50-100 μM (Figs. 2M ad 2N); (3) removal of magnesium (0-Mg4"1) - 1 hours perfusion (Figs. 20 and 2P); and (4) removal of calcium plus extracellular chelation (0-Ca"1"1") (Figs. 2Q and 2R). With each of these manipulations, spontaneous interictal-like patterns were simultaneously recorded from CAl and C A3 subfϊelds (Figs. 2K, 2L, 2M and 2N show only the CA3 trace and Figs. 2O, 2P, 2Q, and 2R show only the CAl trace). In the 0-Ca+* experiments, 5 mM furosemide blocked the bursting with a latency of 15-20 minutes. For all other protocols, bursting was blocked by 2.5 mM furosemide with a latency of 20-60 minutes. Furosemide reversibly blocked the spontaneous bursting activity in both CA l and CA3 in all experiments (Figs 2L, 2N, 2P and 2R).
EXAMPLE 70
The effects of furosemide on epileptiform activity induced by i.v. injection of kainic acid in anesthetized rats
This example illustrates an in vivo model in which epileptiform activity was induced by i.v. injection of kainic acid (KA) into anesthetized rats (Lothman et al., Neurology 31 :806, 1981 ). The results are illustrated in Figs. 3A - 3H. Sprague-Dawley rats (4 animals; weights 250-270 g) were anesthetized with urethane (1.25 g/kg i.p.) and anesthesia maintained by additional urethane injections (0.25 g/kg i.p.) as needed. Body temperature was monitored using a rectal temperature probe and maintained at 35-37° C with a heating pad; heart rate (EKG) was continuously monitored. The jugular vein was cannulated on one side for intravenous drug administration. Rats were placed in a Kopf stereotaxic device (with the top of the skull level), and a bipolar stainless-steel microelectrode insulated to 0.5 mm of the tip was inserted to a depth of 0.5-1.2 mm from the cortical surface to record electroencephalographic (EEG) activity in the fronto-parietal cortex. In some experiments, a 2M NaCl-containing pipette was lowered to a depth of 2.5-3.0 mm to record hippocampal EEG. Data were stored on VHS videotape and analyzed off-line.
Following the surgical preparation and electrode placement, animals were allowed to recover for 30 minutes before the experiments were initiated with an injection of kainic acid (10-12 mg/kg i.v.). Intense seizure activity, an increased heart rate, and rapid movements of the vibrissae were induced with a latency of about 30 minutes. Once stable electrical seizure was evident, furosemide was delivered in 20 mg/kg boluses every 30 minutes to a total of 3 injections. Experiments were terminated with the intravenous administration of urethane. Animal care was in accordance with NIH guidelines and approved by the University of Washington Animal Care Committee.
Figs. 3A-3H show furosemide blockade of kainic acid-evoked electrical "status epilepticus" in urethane-anesthetized rats. EKG recordings are shown as the top traces and EEG recordings are shown as the bottom traces. In this model, intense electrical discharge (electrical "status epilepticus") was recorded from the cortex (or from depth hippocampal electrodes) 30-60 minutes after KA injection (10-12 mg/kg) (Figs. 3C and 3D). Control experiments (and previous reports, Lothman et al., Neurology, 31 :806, 1981) showed that this status-like activity was maintained for well over 3 hours. Subsequent intravenous injections of furosemide (cumulative dose: 40-60 mg/kg) blocked seizure activity with a latency of 30-45 minutes, often producing a relatively flat EEG (Figs. 3E, 3F, 3G and 3H). Even 90 minutes after the furosemide injection, cortical activity remained near normal baseline levels (i.e., that observed prior to the KA and furosemide injections). Studies on the pharmacokinetics of furosemide in the rat indicate that the dosages used in this example were well below toxic levels (Hammarlund and Paalzow, Biopharmaceutics Drug Disposition, 3:345, 1982). Experimental methods for Examples 71 - 74
Hippocampal slices were prepared from Sprague-Dawley adult rats as described previously. Transverse hippocampal slices 100 μm thick were cut with a vibrating cutter. Slices typically contained the entire hippocampus and subiculum. After cutting, slices were stored in an oxygenated holding chamber at room temperature for at least one hour before recording. All recordings were acquired in an interface type chamber with oxygenated (95% O2, 5%CO2) artificial cerebral spinal fluid (ACSF) at 34°-35°C. Normal ACSF contained (in mmol/1): 124 NaCl, 3 KCl, 1.25 NaH2PO4, 1.2 MgSO4, 26 NaHCO3, 2 CaCl2, and 10 dexrrose.
Sharp-electrodes for intracellular recordings from CAl and C A3 pyramidal cells were filled with 4 M potassium acetate. Field recordings from the CA l and CA3 cell body layers were acquired with low-resistance glass electrodes filled with 2 M NaCl. For stimulation of the Schaffer collateral or hilar pathways, a small monopolar tungsten electrode was placed on the surface of the slice. Spontaneous and stimulation-evoked activities from field and intracellular recordings were digitized (Neurocorder, Neurodata Instruments, New York, NY) and stored on videotape. AxoScope software (Axon Instruments) on a personal computer was used for off-line analysis of data.
In some experiments, normal or low-chloride medium was used containing bicuculline (20 μM), 4-amino pyridine (4-AP) (100 μM), or high-Kr (7.5 or 12 raM). In all experiments, low-chloride solutions (7, and 21 niM [Cl"]o) were prepared by equimolar replacement of NaCI with Na+-gluconate (Sigma). All solutions were prepared so that they had a pH of approximately 7.4 and an osmolality of 290-300 mOsm at 35°C and at equilibrium from carboxygenation with 950X)O2 / 5%CO2.
After placement in the interface chamber, slices were superfused at approximately 1 ml/min. At this flow-rate, it took 8-10 minutes for changes in the perfusion media to be completed. All of the times reported here have taken this delay into account and have an error of approximately ± 2 minutes.
EXAMPLE 71 Timing of cessation of spontaneous epileptiform bursting in areas in CAl and CA3 The relative contributions of the factors that modulate synchronized activity vary between areas CA l and CA3. These factors include differences in the local circuitry' and region-specific differences in cell packing and volume fraction of the extracellular spaces. If the anti-epileptic effects of anion or chloride-cotransport antagonism are due to a desynchronization in the timing of neuronal discharge, chloride-cotransport blockade might be expected to differentially affect areas CAl and CA3. To test this, a series of experiments was performed to characterize differences in the timing of the blockade of spontaneous epileptiform activity in areas CAl and CA3.
Field activity was recorded simultaneously in areas CAl and C A3 (approximately midway between the most proximal and distal extent the CA3 region), and spontaneous bursting was induced by treatment with high-[K+]o (12 μM; n = 12), bicuculline (20 mM; n = 12), or 4-AP (100 μM; n = 5). Single electrical stimuli were delivered to the Schaffer collaterals, midway between areas CAl and CA3, every 30 seconds so that the field responses in areas CAl and CA3 could be monitored throughout the duration of each experiment. In all experiments, at least 20 minutes of continuous spontaneous epileptiform bursting was observed prior to switching to low [Cl~]o (21 mM) or furosemide-containing (2.5 mM) medium.
In all cases, after 30-40 minutes exposure to furosemide or low-chloride medium, spontaneous bursting ceased in area CA l before the bursting ceased in area C A3. The temporal sequence of events typically observed included an initial increase in burst frequency and amplitude of the spontaneous field events, then a reduction in the amplitude of the burst discharges which was more rapid in CAl than in C A3. After CAl became silent, CA3 continued to discharge for 5-10 minutes, until it too no longer exhibited spontaneous epileptiform events. This temporal pattern of burst cessation was observed with all epileptiform- inducing treatments tested, regardless of whether the agent used for blockade of spontaneous bursting was furosemide or low-[Cl"]o medium. Throughout all stages of these experiments, stimulation of the Schaffer collaterals evoked hyperexcited field responses in both the CAl and CA3 cell body layers. Immediately after spontaneous bursting was blocked in both areas CA l and CA3, hyperexcited population spikes could still be evoked.
We considered the possibility that the observed cessation of bursting in CAl prior to CA3 was an artifact of the organization of synaptic contacts between these areas relative to our choice of recording sites. It is known that the projections of the various subregions of CA3 terminate in an organized fashion in CA l; CA3 cells closer to the dentate gyrus (proximal CA3) tend to project most heavily to the distal portions of CAl (near the subicular border), whereas CA3 projections arising from cells located more distally in CA3 terminate more heavily in portions of CA l located closer to the CA2 border. If the cessation of bursting occurs in the different subregions of CA3 at different times, the results of the above set of experiments might arise not as a difference between CA l and CA3, but rather as a function of variability in bursting activity across CA3 subregions. We tested this possibility in three experiments. Immediately after the spontaneous bursting ceased in CA l , we surveyed the CA3 field with a recording electrode. Recordings from several different CA3 locations (from the most proximal to the most distal portions of CA3), showed that all subregions of area CA3 were spontaneously bursting during the time that CAl was silent.
The observation that CA3 continued to discharge spontaneously after CAl became silent was unexpected since population discharges in CA3 are generally thought to evoke discharges in CAl through excitatory synaptic transmission. As previously described, single-pulse stimuli delivered to the Schaffer collaterals still evoked multiple population spikes in CAl even after the blockade of spontaneous bursting; thus, hyperexcited excitatory synaptic transmissions in CA3-to-CAl synapse was intact. Given this maintained efficacy of synaptic transmission, and the continued spontaneous field discharges in CA3, we postulated that the loss of spontaneous bursting in CA l was due to a decrease in synchronization of incoming excitatory drive. Further, since spontaneous epileptiform discharge in CA3 also eventually ceased, perhaps this desynchronization process occurred at different times in the two hippocampal subfields.
EXAMPLE 72
Effect of chloride-cotransport antagonism on the synchronization of CAl and CA3 field population discharges
The observation from Example 4 suggested a temporal relationship between the exposure time to low-[Cl"]o or furosemide-containing medium and the characteristics of the spontaneous burst activity. Further, this relationship was different between areas CA l and CA3. In order to better characterize the temporal relationships, we compared the occurrences of CAl action potentials and the population spike events in the field responses of CAl and CA3 subfields during spontaneous and stimulation-evoked burst discharge. Intracellular recordings were obtained from CA l pyramidal cells, with the intracellular electrode placed close (< 100 μM) to the CA l field electrode. The slice was stimulated every 20 seconds with single stimuli delivered to the Schaffer collaterals. After continuous spontaneous bursting was established for at least 20 minutes, the bathing medium was switched to bicuculline-containing low-[Cl']o (21 mM) medium. After approximately 20 minutes, the burst frequency and amplitude was at its greatest. Simultaneous field and intracellular recordings during this time showed that the CAl field and intracellular recordings were closely synchronized with the CA3 field discharges. During each spontaneous discharge, the CA3 field response preceded the CA 1 discharge by several milliseconds. During stimulation-evoked events, action potential discharges of the CAl pyramidal cell were closely synchronized to both CA3 and CAl field discharges.
With continued exposure to low-[Cr]o medium, the latency between the spontaneous discharges of areas CAl and CA3 increased, with a maximum latency of 30-
40 milliseconds occurring after 30-40 minutes exposure to the bicuculline-containing low-chloride medium. During this time, the amplitude of both the CAl and CA3 spontaneous field discharges decreased. Stimulation-evoked discharges during this time closely mimicked the spontaneously occurring discharges in morphology and relative latency. However, the initial stimulus-evoked depolarization of the neuron (presumably, the monosynaptic EPSP) began without any significant increase in latency. The time interval during which these data were acquired corresponds to the time immediately prior to the cessation of spontaneous bursting in CAl .
After 40-50 minutes perfusion with low-[Cl"]o medium, the spontaneous bursts were nearly abolished in CAl but were unaffected in CA3. Schaffer collateral stimulation during this time showed that monosynaptically-triggered responses of CAl pyramidal cells occurred without any significant increase in latency, but that stimulation- evoked field responses were almost abolished. The time interval during which these data were acquired corresponds to the moments immediately prior to the cessation of spontaneous bursting in C A3.
After prolonged exposure to low-[Cl']o medium, large increases (>30 milliseconds) developed in the latency between Schaffer collateral stimulation and the consequent CA3 field discharge. Eventually, no field responses could be evoked by Schaffer collateral stimulation in either areas CAl and CA3. However, action potential discharge from CAl pyramidal cells in response to Schaffer collateral stimulation could be evoked with little change in response latency. Indeed, for the entire duration of the experiments (greater than two hours), action potential discharges form CAl pyramidal cells could be evoked at short latency by Schaffer collateral stimulation. Further, although stimulation-evoked hyperexcited discharges of CA3 were eventually blocked after prolonged exposure to low-[CT]o medium, the antidromic response in CA3 appeared to be preserved.
EXAMPLE 73
Effects of chloride-cotransport antagonism on the synchronization of burst discharges in CAl pyramidal cells
The foregoing data suggest the disappearance of the field responses may be due to a desynchronization of the occurrence of action potentials among neurons. That is, although synaptically-driven excitation of CA 1 pyramidal cells was not preserved, action potential synchrony among the CAl neuronal population was not sufficient to summate into a measurable DC field response. In order to test this, paired intracellular recordings of CA l pyramidal cells were acquired simultaneously with CAl field responses. In these experiments, both the intracellular electrodes and the field recording electrodes were placed within 200 μm of one another.
During the period of maximum spontaneous activity induced by bicuculline- containing low-[Cl"]o medium, recordings showed that action potentials between pairs of CAl neurons and the CAl field discharges were tightly synchronized both during spontaneous and stimulation-evoked discharges. After continued exposure to low-[Cl"]o medium, when the amplitude of the CAl field discharge began to broaden and diminish, both spontaneous and stimulation-evoked discharges showed a desynchronization in the timing of the occurrences of action potentials between pairs of CAl neurons, and between the action potentials and the field responses. This desynchronization was coincident with the suppression of CAl field amplitude. By the time that spontaneous bursting in CAl ceased, a significant increase in latency had developed between Schaffer collateral stimulation and CA 1 field discharge. At this time, paired intracellular recordings showed a dramatic desynchronization in the timing of action potential discharge between pairs of neurons and between the occurrence of action potentials and the field discharges evoked by Schaffer collateral stimulation.
It is possible that the observed desynchronization of CAl action potential discharge is due to the randomization of mechanisms necessary for synaptically-driven action potential generation, such as a disruption in the timing of synaptic release or random conduction failures at neuronal processes. If this were the case, then one would expect that the occurrence of action potentials between a given pair of neurons would vary randomly with respect to one another, from stimulation to stimulation. We tested this by comparing the patterns of action potential discharge of pairs of neurons between multiple consecutive stimuli of the Schaffer collaterals. During each stimulation event, the action potentials occurred at nearly identical times with respect to one another, and showed an almost identical burst morphology from stimulation to stimulation. We also checked to see whether the occurrence of action potentials between a given pair of neurons during spontaneous field discharges was fixed in time. The patterns of action potential discharges from a given pair of CA l neurons was compared between consecutive spontaneous field bursts during the time when the occurrence of action potentials was clearly desynchronized. Just as in the case of stimulation-evoked action potential discharge described above, the action potentials generated during a spontaneous population discharge occurred at nearly identical times with respect to one another, and showed a nearly identical burst morphology from one spontaneous discharge to the next.
EXAMPLE 74 Effects of low-chloride treatment on spontaneous synaptic activity It is possible that the anti-epileptic effects associated with chloride-cotransport antagonism are mediated by some action on transmitter release. Blockade of chloride- cotransport could alter the amount or timing of transmitter released from terminals, thus affecting neuronal synchronization. To test whether low-[Cl"]o exposure affected mechanisms associated with transmitter release, intracellular CAl responses were recorded simultaneously with CAl and CA3 field responses during a treatment which dramatically increases spontaneous synaptic release of transmitter from presynaptic terminals.
Increased spontaneous release of transmitter was induced by treatment with 4-AP (100 μM). After 40 minutes exposure to 4-AP-containing medium, spontaneous synchronized burst discharges were recorded in area CAl and C A3. Switching to 4-AP- containing low-[Cl']o medium led initially, as was shown previously, to enhanced spontaneous bursting. High-grain intracellular recordings showed that high-amplitude spontaneous synaptic activity was elicited by 4-AP treatment. Further exposure to low- chloride medium blocked spontaneous burst discharge in CAl, although CA3 continued to discharge spontaneously. At this time, CA l intracellular recordings showed that spontaneous synaptic noise was further increased, and remained so for prolonged exposure times to 4-AP-containing low-chloride medium. These data suggest that mechanisms responsible for synaptic release from terminals are not adversely affected by low-chloride exposure in a manner that could explain the blockade of 4-AP-induced spontaneous bursting in CAl . These results also eliminate the possibility that the effects of low-[Cl"]o exposure are due to alterations in CAl dendritic properties which would compromise their efficiency in conducting PSPs to the soma.
Experimental Methods for Examples 75 to 79
In all of the following experiments, [Cl']o was reduced by equimolar replacement of NaCl with Na+-gluconate. Gluconate was used rather than other anion replacements for several reasons. First, patch-clamp studies have demonstrated that gluconate appears to be virtually impermeant to chloride channels, whereas other anions (including sulfate, isethionate, and acetate) are permeable to varying degrees. Second, transport of extracellular potassium through glial NKCCl cotransport is blocked when extracellular chloride is replaced by gluconate but is not completely blocked when replaced by isethionate. Since this furosemide-sensitive cotransporter plays a significant role in cell swelling and volume changes of the extracellular space (ECS), we wished to use the appropriate anion replacement so that the effects of our treatment would be comparable to previous furosemide experiments (Hochman et al. Science, 270:99-102, 1995; US Patent No. 5,902,732). Third, formate, acetate, and proprionate generate weak acids when employed as Cl" substitutes and lead to a prompt fall in intracellular pH; gluconate remains extracellular and has not been reported to induce intracellular pH shifts. Fourth, for purposes of comparison we wished to use the same anion replacement that had been used in previous studies examining the effects of low-[Cl"]o on activity-evoked changes of the ECS.
There is some suggestion that certain anion-replacements might chelate calcium. Although subsequent work has failed to demonstrate any significant ability of anion- substitutes to chelate calcium, there is still some concern in the literature regarding this issue. Calcium chelation did not appear to be an issue in the following experiments, since resting membrane potentials remained normal and synaptic responses (indeed, hyperexcitable synaptic responses) could be elicited even after several hours of exposure to medium in which [Cl'jo had been reduced by gluconate substitution. Further, we confirmed that calcium concentration in our low-[Cl"]o -medium was identical to that in our control-medium by measurements made with Ca + - selective microelectrodes.
Sprague-Dawley adult rats were prepared as previously described. Briefly, transverse hippocampal slices, 400 μm thick, were cut using a vibrating cutter. Slices typically contained the entire hippocampus and subiculum. After cutting, slices were stored in an oxygenated holding chamber for at least one hour prior to recording. All recordings were acquired in an interface type chamber with oxygenated (95% O2/5% CO2) artificial cerebral spinal fluid (ACSF) at 34°-35°C. Normal ACSF contained (in mmol/1): 124 NaCl, 3 KCl, 1.25 NaH2PO4, 1.2 MgSO4, 26 NaHCO3, 2 CaCl2, and 10 dextrose. In some experiments, normal or low-chloride medium was used containing bicuculline (20 μM), 4-AP (100 μM), or high-K+ (12 ltiM). Low-chloride solutions (7, 16, and 21 mM [Cl~]o) were prepared by equimolar replacement of NaCl with Na+- gluccnate (Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO). AU solutions were prepared so that they had a pH of approximately 7.4 and an osmolarity of 290-300 mOsm :it 35°C and at equilibrium from carboxygenution with 95% O2 / 5% CO2.
Sharp-electrodes filled with 4 M potassium acetate were used for intracellular recordings from CAl pyramidal cells. Field recordings from the CA l or CΛ3 cell body layers were acquired with low-resistance glass electrodes filled with NaCl (2 M). For .stimulation of the Schaffer collateral pathway, a small monopolar electrode wi'S placed on ,- the surface of the slice midw ay between areas CAl and CA3. Spontaneous ;ind, stimulation-evoked activities from field and intracellular recordings were digitized i Neurocorder,- Neurodata Instruments,. New York, NY), and stored on video tape. • AxoScope software (Axon Instruments Inc.) on a PC-computer was used for off-line analyses of data. Ion-selective microelectrodes were fabricated according to standard methods well known in Ihcavt. Double-barreled pipettes were pulled and broken to a- tip diameter of approximately 3.0 μm. The reference barrel was filled with ACSF and the other barrel was sylani/ed and the tip back-filled Λvith a resin selective for K+ (Corning 4773 17). The remainder of the sylanized barrel was tilled with KCl ( 140 mM). Each barrel was led, via Ag/AgCl wires, to a high impedance dual -differential amplifier (WPI FD223). Each ion- selective microelectrcde was calibrated by the use of solutions of known ionic composition and was considered suitable if it was characterized by a near- Mernstian slope response and if it remained stable throughout the duration of the experiment.
After placement in the interface chamber, slices were superfused at approximately I m!/minute. At this flow-rate, it took approximately 8-10 minutes for changes in perfusion media to be completed. All of the times reported here have taken this time- delay into account and have an error of approximately ± 2 minutes. EXAMPLE 75
Effects of Iow-fCl-lo on CAl field recordings
Other studies have shown that prolonged exposure of cortical and hippocampal slices to low-[Cl"]o does not affect basic intrinsic and synaptic properties such as input resistance, resting membrane potential, depolarization-induced action-potential generation, or excitatory synaptic transmission. A previous study has also partly characterized the epileptogenic properties of low-[Cl']o exposure to the CAl area of hippocampus. The following studies were performed to observe the times of onset and possible cessation of low-[Cr]o-induced hyperexcitability and hypersynchronization. Slices (n = 6) were initially perfused with normal medium until stable intracellular and field recordings were established in a CAl pyramidal cell and the CAl cell body layer, respectively. In two experiments, the same cell was held throughout the entire length of the experiment (greater than 2 hours). In the remaining experiments (n = 4), the initial intracellular recording was lost during the sequence of medium changes and additional recordings were acquired from different cells. Patterns of neuronal activity in these experiments were identical to those seen when a single cell was observed.
The field and intracellular electrodes were always placed in close proximity to one another (< 200 μm). In each case, after approximately 15-20 minutes exposure to the low-[Cr]o-medium (7 mM), spontaneous bursting developed, first at the cellular level, and then in the field. This spontaneous field activity, representing synchronized burst discharge in a large population of neurons, lasted from 5 - 10 minutes, after which time the field recording became silent. When the field first became silent, the cell continued to discharge spontaneously. This result suggests that population activity has been "desynchronized" while the ability of individual cells to discharge has not been impaired. After approximately 30 minutes exposure to low-[Cl"]o-medium, intracellular recording showed that cells continued to discharge spontaneously even though the field remained silent. The response of the cell to intracellular current injection at two time points demonstrated that the cell's ability to generate action potentials had not been impaired by low-[Cl"]o exposure. Further, electrical stimulation in CAl stratum radiatum elicited burst discharges, indicating that a hyperexcitable state was maintained in the tissue. EXAMPLE 76
Effects of Iow-fCl-lo on high-fK+lo-induced epileptiform activity in CAl
The previous set of experiments showed that tissue exposure to low-[Cl']o medium induced a brief period of spontaneous field potential bursting which ceased within 10 minutes. If a reduction of [Ci~]o is indeed eventually capable of blocking spontaneous epileptiform (i.e. synchronized) bursting, then these results suggest that anti- epileptic effects would likely be observable only after this initial period of bursting activity has ceased. We therefore examined the temporal effects of low-[Cl"]o-treatment on high-[K+]o-induced bursting activity. Slices (n = 12) were exposed to medium in which [K+]o had been increased to 12 mM, and field potentials were recorded with a field electrode in the CAl cell body layer. Spontaneous field potential bursting was observed for at least 20 minutes, and then the slices were exposed to medium in which [K+]o was maintained at 12 mM, but [Cl"]o was reduced to 21 mM. Within 15-20 minutes after the tissue was exposed to the low-[Cl"]o/high-[K+]o-medium, the burst amplitude increased and each field event had a longer duration. After a brief period of this facilitated field activity (lasting 5-10 minutes), the bursting stopped. To test whether this blockade was reversible, after at least 10 minutes of field potential silence, we switched back to high- [Kτ]o-medium with normal [CI"]o. The bursting returned within 20-40 minutes. Throughout each experiment, the CAl field response to Schaffer collateral stimulation was monitored. The largest field responses were recorded just before the cessation of spontaneous bursting, during the period when the spontaneous bursts had the largest amplitude. Even after the blockade of spontaneous bursting, however, multiple population spikes were elicited by Schaffer collateral stimulation, indicating that synaptic transmission was intact, and that the tissue remained hyperexcitable.
In four slices, intracellular recordings from CAl pyramidal cells were acquired along with the CAl field recording. During the period of high-[K÷]o-induced spontaneous .bursting, hyperpolarizing current was injected into the cell so that postsynaptic potentials (PSPs) could be better observed. After low-[Cl"]o-blockade of spontaneous bursting, spontaneously occurring action potentials and PSPs were still observed. These observations further support the view that synaptic activity, per se, was not blocked by the low-[Cl"]o treatment. EXAMPLE 77
Low-fCl lo - blockade of epileptiform activity induced by 4-AP, high-[K+1o , and bicuculline in CAl and CA3
We next tested whether low-[Cl']o treatment could block epileptiform activity in areas CAl -and C A3, which was elicited by different pharmacological treatments, as we had shown for furosemide treatment. For this set of experiments, we chose to test the effects of low-[Cl"]o treatment on spontaneous bursting which had been induced by high- [K+]o (12 inM) (ή = 5), 4-AP (100 μM) (n = 4), and bicuculline (20 and 100 μM) (n = 5). In each set of experiments, field responses were recorded simultaneously from areas CAl and CA3, and in each case, the spontaneous epileptiform activity in both areas CAl and CA3, was reversibly blocked within 30 minutes after [Cl"]o in the perfusion medium had been reduced to 21 mM. These data suggest that, like furosemide, low-[Cl"]o reversibly blocks spontaneous bursting in several of the most commonly studied in vitro models of epileptiform activity.
EXAMPLE 78
Comparison between low-fCl'io and furosemide on blockade of high-[K+lo-induced epileptiform activity
The data from the previous sets of experiments are consistent with the hypothesis that the anti-epileptic effects of both low-[Cl~]o and furosemide are mediated by their actions on the same physiological mechanisms. To further test this hypothesis, we compared the temporal sequence of effects of low-[Cl"]o (n = 12) and furosemide (2.5 and 5 mM) (n = 4) on high-[K+]o-induced bursting, as recorded with a field electrode in CAl . We found that both low-[Cl"]o and furosemide treatment induced a similar temporal sequence of effects: an initial brief period of increased amplitude of field activity, and then blockade (reversible) of spontaneous field activity. In both cases, electrical stimulation of the Schaffer collaterals elicited hyperexcited responses even after the spontaneous bursting had been blocked.
EXAMPLE 79 Consequences of prolonged exposure to low-fCl-lo medium with varied [K+lo
In the preceding experiments, we monitored field activity in some slices for > 1 hour after the spontaneous bursting had been blocked by low-[Cl"]o exposure. After such prolonged low-[Cl"]o exposure, spontaneous, long-lasting, depolarizing shifts developed. The morphology and frequency of these late-occurring field events appeared to be related to the extracellular potassium and chloride concentrations. Motivated by these observations, we performed a set of experiments in which we systematically varied [Cl"]o and [K+]o and observed the effects of these ion changes on the late-occurring spontaneous field events.
In our first set of experiments, slices were exposed to medium containing low- [Cl]o (7 mM) and normal-[K+]o (3 mM) (n = 6). After 50-70 minutes exposure to this medium, spontaneous events were recorded in area CAl; these events appeared as 5-10 mV negative shifts in the DC field, with the first episode lasting for 30-60 seconds. Each subsequent episode was longer than the previous one. This observation suggested that ion-homeostatic mechanisms were diminished over time as a result of the ion concentrations in the bathing medium. In some experiments (n = 2) in which these negative DC field shifts had been induced, intracellular recordings from CAl pyramidal cells were acquired simultaneously with the CAl field recordings.
For these experiments, the intracellular and field recordings were acquired close to one another (< 200 μm). Prior to each negative field shift (10-20 seconds), the neuron began to depolarize. Cellular depolarization was indicated by a decrease in resting membrane potential, an increase in spontaneous firing frequency, and a reduction of action potential amplitude. Coincident with the onset of the negative field shifts, the cells became sufficiently depolarized so that they were unable to fire spontaneous or current- elicited (not shown) action potentials. Since neuronal depolarization began 10-20 seconds prior to the field shift, it may be that a gradual increase in extracellular potassium resulted in the depolarization of a neuronal population, thus initiating these field events. Such an increase in [K+]o might be due to alterations of the chloride-dependent glial cotransport mechanisms that normally move potassium from extracellular to intracellular spaces. To test whether increases in [K+]o preceded these negative field shifts (and paralleled cellular depolarization), experiments (n=2) were performed in which a K+- selective microelectrode was used to record changes in [K+]o.
In each experiment, the K.+-selective microelectrode and a field electrode were placed in the CAl pyramidal layer close to one another (< 200 μm), and a stimulation pulse was delivered to the Schaffer collaterals every 20 seconds so that the magnitude of the population spike could be monitored. Multiple spontaneously occurring negative field shifts were evoked by perfusion with low-[Cl"o] (7 mM) medium. Each event was associated with a significant increase in [K+]o, with the [K+]o increase starting several seconds prior to the onset of negative field shift. A slow 1.5-2.0 mM increase in [K+]o occurred over a time interval of approximately 1-2 minute seconds prior to the onset of each event. The stimulation-evoked field responses slowly increased in amplitude over time, along with the increasing [K+]o, until just before the negative field shift.
In a second set of experiments (n = 4), [K+]o was increased to 12 mM and [Cl-]o was increased to 16 mM. After 50-90 minutes exposure to this medium, slow oscillations were recorded in area CAl . These oscillations were characterized by 5- 10 mV negative
DC shifts in the field potential and had a periodicity of approximately 1 cycle/40 seconds.
Initially, these oscillations occurred intermittently and had an irregular morphology.
Over time, these oscillations became continuous and developed a regular waveform.
Upon exposure to furosemide (2.5 mM), the amplitude of the oscillations was gradually decreased and the frequency increased until the oscillations were completely blocked.
Such low-[Cl]o - induced oscillations in tissue slices have not been previously reported.
However, the temporal characteristics of the oscillatory events bear a striking resemblance to the low-[Cl]o - induced [K+]o oscillations which were previously described in a purely axonal preparation. In a third set of experiments (n = 5) [Cl~]o was further increased to 21 mM and
[K+]o was reduced back to 3 mM. In these experiments, single, infrequently occurring negative shifts of the field potential developed within 40 - 70 minutes (data not shown).
These events (5-10 mV) lasting 40-60 seconds, occurred at random intervals, and maintained a relatively constant duration throughout the experiment. These events could sometimes be elicited by a single electrical stimulus delivered to the Schaffer collaterals. - Finally, in a final set of experiments (n = 5), [Cl~]o was kept at 21 mM and [K+]o was raised to 12 mM. In these experiments, late-occurring spontaneous field events were not observed during the course of the experiments (2-3 hours).
EXAMPLE 80
Changes in [K+In during low-chloride exposure
Sprague-Dawley adult rats were prepared as previously described. Transverse hippocampal slices, 400 μm thick, were cut with a vibrating cuter and stored in an oxygenated holding chamber for 1 hour before recording. A submersion-type chamber was used for K+-selective microelectrode recordings. Slices were perfused with oxygenated (95% O2/5% CO2) artificial cerebrospinal fluid (ACSF) at 34-350C. Normal ACSF contained 10 mM dextrose, 124 mM NaCl, 3 mM KCl, 1.25 mM NaH2PO4, 1.2 mM MgSO4, 26 mM NaHCO3 and 2 mM CaCl2. In some experiments, normal or low- chloride medium was used containing 4-aminopyridine (4-AP) at lOOμM. Low-chloride solutions (21 mM [Cl]o) were prepared by equimolar replacement of NaCl with Na+- gluconate (Sigma Chemical Co.).
Field recordings from the CAl or CA3 cell body layers were acquired with low- resistance glass electrodes filled with NaCl (2M). For stimulation of the Schaffer collateral pathway, a monopolar stainless-steel electrode was placed on the surface of the slide midway between areas CAl and C A3. All recordings were digitized (Neurorocorder, Neurodata Instruments, New York, NY) and stored on videotape.
K+ selective microelectrodes were fabricated according to standard methods. Briefly, the reference barrel of a double-barreled pipette was filled with ACSF, and the other barrel was sylanized and the tip back-filled with KCl with K+-selective resin (Corning 477317). Ion-selective microelectrodes were calibrated and considered suitable if they had a Nernstian slope response and remained stable throughout the duration of the experiment.
Exposure of hippocarcpal slices to low-[Cl-]o medium has been shown to include a temporally-dependent sequence of changes on the activity of CAl pyramidal cells, with three characteristics phases, as described above. In brief, exposure to low-[Ci-]o medium results in a brief period of increased, hyperexcitability and spontaneous epileptiform discharge. With further exposure to low-[Cl"]o medium, spontaneous epileptiform activity is blocked, but cellular hyperexcitability remains, - and action potential firing times, become less synchronized with one another. Lastly, with prolonged exposure, the action potential fi> ing times become sufficiemly desyπchronized so that stimulaticn_-e\ oked. fielcL. responses completely disappear, yet individual cells continue to show monosynaptic! Iy- evoked responses io Schaffer collateral stimulation. The following results demonstrate that the anti epileptic effects of furosemide on chloride-cotransport antagonism are independent of direct actions on excitatory synaptic transmission, and are a consequence of a desynchronization of population activity with our any associated decrease in excitability.
In six hippocampal slices, K+-selective and field microelectrodes were placed in the CA ! cell body layer, and a stimulating electrode was placed on the Schaffer collateral pathway, and r.ingle-pulse stimuli (300 μs) were delivered every 20 seconds. After stable baseline [K+Jo was observed for at least 20 minutes, the perfusion was switched to !ow- [Cl"]o medium. Within 1 -2 minutes of exposure to low-[Cl"]o medium, the field responses became hyperexcitable as the [K+Jo began to rise. After approximately 4-5 minutes of exposure to low-[Cl']o medium, the magnitude of the field response diminished until it was completely abolished. The corresponding recording of [K+]o showed that potassium began to rise immediately after exposure to low-[Cl']o medium, and that the peak of this [K+Jo rise corresponded in time to the maximally hyperexcitable CAl field response. Coincident with the reduction of the magnitude of the field response, the [K+]o began to diminish until after 8-10 minutes exposure to low-[Cl"]o medium, it became constant for the remainder of the experiment at 1.8-2.5 mM above control levels. Four slices were switched back to control medium and allowed to fully recover. The experiment was then repeated with the K+-selective microelectrode placed in the stratum radiatum. A similar sequence of changes in [K+]o was observed in the dendritic layer, with the values of [K+Jo being 0.2-0.3 mM less than those observed in the cell body layers.
In four hippocampal slices, the responses of stimulation-evoked changes in [K+]o between control conditions and after the CAl field response was completely abolished by low-[Cr]o exposure were compared. In each slice, the [K+]o-selective measurements were acquired first in the cell body layer, and then after allowance for complete recovery in control medium, the experiment was repeated with the K+-selective electrode moved to the stratum radiatum. Each stimulation trial consisted of a 10 Hz volley delivered to the Schaffer collateral for 5 seconds. The peak rises in [K+]o were similar between control conditions an after prolonged exposure to low-[Q"]o medium, and between the cell body and dendritic layers. However, the recovery times observed after prolonged exposure to low-[Cl"]o were significantly longer than those observed during control conditions.
These results demonstrate that the administration of furosemide resulted in increased [K+]o in the extracellular spaces. Exposure of the brain tissue to low-[Cl"]o medium immediately induced a rise in [K+]o by 1-2 mM, which remained throughout the duration of exposure, and was coincident with the initial increase in excitability and the eventual abolishment of the CAl field response. This loss of CAl field response during low-[Cl"]o exposure is most likely due to the desynchronization of neuronal firing times. Significantly, the stimulation-evoked increases in [K+]o, in both the cell body and dendritic layers were nearly identical before and after the complete low-[Cr]0 blockade of the CAl field response. This data suggests that comparable stimulation-evoked synaptic drive and action potential generation occurred under control conditions and after low [Cl" ]o blockade of the field. Together these data demonstrate that the antiepileptic and desynchronizing effects of the chloride-cotransport antagonist, furosemide, are independent of direct actions on excitatory synaptic transmission and are a consequence of a desynchronization of population activity without decrease in excitability.
EXAMPLE 81 Changes in extracellular pH during low-chloride exposure Antagonists of the anion/chlori de-dependent cotransporter, such as furosemide and low-[Cl-]o, may affect extracellular pH transients that might contribute to the maintenance of synchronized population activity. Rat hippocampal brain slices were prepared as described in Example 80, except the NaHCO3 was substituted by equimolar amount of HEPES (26 nM) and an interface-type chamber was used. In four hippocampal brain slices continuous spontaneous bursting was elicited by exposure to medium containing 100 μM 4-AP, as described in Example 13. Field recordings were acquired simultaneously from the cell body layers in areas CAl and CA3. A stimulus delivered every 30 seconds to the Schaffer collaterals throughout the duration of the experiments. After at least 20 minutes of continuous bursting was observed, the slices were exposed to nominally bicarbonate free, 4-AP-containing HEPES medium. There were no significant changes observed in the spontaneous or stimulation- evoked field responses resulting from prolonged exposure (0.2 hours) to HEPES medium. After the slices had been exposed for at least 2 hours to the HEPES medium, the perfusion was switched to 4-AP-containing HEPES medium in which the [Cl~]o had been reduced to 21 mM. Exposure to the low-[Cl']o HEPES medium induced the identical sequences of events, and at the same time course, as had previously been observed with low-[Cl"]o NaHCO3-containing medium. After complete blockade of spontaneous bursting, the perfusion medium was switched back to HEPES medium with normal [Cl"]o. Within 20-40 minutes, spontaneous bursting resumed. At the time the spontaneous bursting had resumed, the slices had been perfused with nominally bicarbonate-free HEPES medium for greater than 3 hours.
This data suggests that the actions of chloride-cotransport antagonism on synchronization and excitability are independent of affects on the dynamics of extracellular pH. Figure 4 illustrates a schematic model of ion cotransport under conditions of reduced [Cl"]. Fig. 4A, left panel, shows that the chloride gradient necessary for the generation of IPSPs in neurons is maintained by efflux of ions through a furosemide- sensitive K+,C1" cotransporter. Under normal conditions, a high concentration of intracellular potassium (maintained by the 3Na+, 2K+-ATPase pump) serves as the driving force for the extrusion of Cl' against its concentration gradient. In glial cells, as shown in the right panel of Fig. 4A, the movement of ions through the furosemide-sensitive NKCC co-transporter is from extracellular to intracellular spaces. The ion-gradients necessary for this cotransport are maintained, in part, by the "transmembrane sodium cycle": sodium ions taken into glial cells through NKCC cotransport are continuously extruded by the 3Na+,2K ,-ATPase pump so that a low intracellular sodium concentration is maintained. The rate and direction of ion-flux through the furosemide-dependent cotransporters are functionally proportional to their ion-product differences written as [K+]; x [Cη . - [K1-]O x [Cl"] o) for neuronal K\ Cl" cotransport and as [Na+J i x [K"]. K [Cl" ]2 1 - [Na"] o x [K+]o x [Cl"]2 o) for glial NKCC cotransport. The sign of these ion-product differences show the direction of ion transport with positive being from intracellular to extracellular spaces.
Figure 4B shows a schematic phenomenological model that explains the emergence of the late-occurrir.g spontaneous field events that arise as a result of prolonged low -[C!"]o exposure. We denote the ion-product differences for neurons and glia as QN and QG, respectively. Under control conditions (1), the differences of the ion- products for neuronsi. are. such I hat IC+ and Cl" are cotransported from intracellular to extracellular spaees (QN > 0); the differences in ion-products for glial cslLs are such that Na4. K" and Cl' are cotransported from the ECS to intracellular compartments (QG < 0). When [C!"]o is reduced (2), the ion-product differences are altered so that neuronal efflux of KCI is increasef1; however, the glial icon cotransport is reversed (QG s 0), <■'<, that lhcre is a net efflux υf KCl and NaCl from intracellular to extracellular spaces. These changes result in buildup of extracellular potassium over time. Eventually, [K+]o reaches a level that induces the depolarization of neuronal populations, resulting in an even larger accumulation of [K+]o. This large accumulation of extracellular ions then serves to reverse the ion-product differences so that KCl is moved from exlracelhilai to intracellular spaces (QN < 0, QG < 0) (3). Further clearance of the extracellular potassium eventually resets the transmembrane ion gradients to initial conditions. By cycling through this process, repetitive negative field events are generated. EXAMPLE 82
Therapeutic Efficacy of Furosemide in the Alleviation of Pain Symptoms in an Animal Model of Neuropathic Pain
The ability of furosemide to alleviate pain will be examined in rodents using the Chung model of neuropathic pain (see, for example, Walker et al. MoI. Med. Today 5:319-321 , 1999). Sixteen adult male Long-Evans rats will be used in this study. All rats will receive spinal ligation of the L5 nerve as detailed below. Eight of the sixteen rats will receive an injection (intravenous) of furosemide and the remaining eight will receive intravenous injection of vehicle only. Pain threshold will be assessed immediately using the mechanical paw withdrawal test. Differences in pain thresholds between the two groups will be compared. If furosemide alleviates pain, the group with the furosemide treatment will exhibit a higher pain threshold than the group that received vehicle.
Chung model of neuropathy
Spinal nerve ligation is performed under isoflourane anesthesia with animals placed in the prone position to access the left L4-L6 spinal nerves. Under magnification, approximately one-third of the transverse process is removed. The L5 spinal nerve is identified and carefully dissected free from the adjacent L4 spinal nerve and then tightly ligated using a 6-0 silk suture. The wound is treated with an antiseptic solution, the muscle layer is sutured, and the incision is closed with wound clips. Behavioral testing of mechanical paw withdrawal threshold takes place within a 3 - 7 day period following the incision. Briefly, animals are placed within a Plexiglas chamber (20 x 10.5 x 40.5 cm) and allowed to habituate for 15 min. The chamber is positioned on top of a mesh screen so that mechanical stimuli can be administered to the plantar surface of both hindpaws. Mechanical threshold measurements for each hindpaw are obtained using an up/down method with eight von Frey monofilaments (5, 7, 13, 26, 43, 64, 106, and 202 mN). Each trial begins with a von Frey force of 13 mN delivered to the right hindpaw for approximately 1 sec, and then the left hindpaw. If there is no withdrawal response, the next higher force is delivered. If there is a response, the next lower force is delivered. This procedure is performed until no response is made at the highest force (202 mN) or until four stimuli are administered following the initial response. The 50% paw withdrawal threshold for each paw is calculated using the following formula: [Xth]log = [vFr]log + ky where [vFr] is the force of the last von Frey used, k = 0.2268 which is the average interval (in log units) between the von Frey monofilaments, and y is a value that depends upon the pattern of withdrawal responses. If an animal does not respond to the highest von Frey hair (202 mN), then y = 1.00 and the 50% mechanical paw withdrawal response for that paw is calculated to be 340.5 mN. Mechanical paw withdrawal threshold testing is performed three times and the 50% withdrawal values are averaged over the three trials to determine the mean mechanical paw withdrawal threshold for the right and left paw for each animal.
EXAMPLE 83
Therapeutic Efficacy of Furosemide and Bumetanide in Alleviating the Symptoms of Intense Anxiety or Post Traumatic Stress Disorder The therapeutic usefulness of furosemide and bumetanide in the treatment of post traumatic stress disorder is examined by determining the ability of these compounds to alleviate intense anxiety in contextual fear conditioning in rats.
Contextual fear conditioning involves pairing an aversive event, in this case moderate foot shock, with a distinctive environment. The strength of the fear memory is assessed using freezing, a species-typical defensive reaction in rats, marked by complete immobility, except for breathing. If rats are placed into a distinctive environment and are immediately shocked they do not learn to fear the context. However, if they are allowed to explore the distinctive environment sometime before the immediate shock, they show intense anxiety and fear when placed back into the same environment. We can take advantage of this fact and, by procedurally dividing contextual fear conditioning into two phases, we can separately study effects of treatments on memory for the context (specifically a hippocampus based process) from learning the association between context and shock or experiencing the aversiveness of the shock (which depend upon emotional response circuitry including amygdala). Post traumatic stress syndrome (PTSD) in humans has been shown to be related to emotional response circuitry in the amygdala, and for this reason contextual memory conditioning is a widely accepted model for PTSD.
The experiment employed 24 rats. Each rat received a single 5 min episode of exploration of a small, novel environment. Seventy-two hours later they were placed into the same environment and immediately received two moderate foot-shocks (1 milliamp) separated by 53 sec. Twenty-four hours later, 8 of the rats received an injection (LV.) of furosemide (100 mg/kg) in vehicle (DMSO), and 8 of the rats were injected LV. with bumetanide (50 mg/kg) in vehicle (DMSO). The remaining 8 rats received an injection of DMSO alone. Each rat was again placed into the same environment for 8 min during which time freezing was measured, as an index of Pavlovian conditioned fear.
Four identical chambers (20 X 20 X 15 cm) were used. All aspects of the timing and control of events were under microcomputer control (MedPC, MedAssociates Inc., Vermont, USA). Measurement of freezing was accomplished through an overhead video camera connected to the microcomputer and was automatically scored using a specialty piece of software, FreezeFrame (OER Inc., Reston, VA). Total freezing time was analyzed in a one-way analysis of variance (ANOVA) test, with drug dose as the within- groups factor.
As shown in Fig. 5 significantly less freezing was observed in animals treated with either bumetanide or furosemide than in animals receiving vehicle alone, indicating that bumetanide and furosemide may be effectively employed in the treatment of post traumatic stress disorder.
EXAMPLE 84 Therapeutic Efficacy of Furosemide and Bumetanide in Alleviating Anxiety
The therapeutic efficacy of furosemide and bumetanide in alleviating anxiety was examined by evaluating the effects of these compounds in fear potentiated startle (FPS) test in rats. This test is commonly used to distinguish anxiolytic drug effects from nonspecific effects, such as sedation/muscle relaxation Twenty-four rats received a 30 min period of habituation to the FPS apparatus.
Twenty-four hours later, baseline startle amplitudes were collected. The rats were then divided into three matched groups based on baseline startle amplitudes. One of the rats exhibited a significantly higher baseline startle than the others and was excluded from the experiments. Groups 1 and 2 therefore consisted of 8 rats each, with Group 3 consisting of 7 rats. Following baseline startle amplitude collection, 20 light/shock pairings were delivered on two sessions over two consecutive days (i.e., 10 light/shock pairings per day). On the final day (day 5), Groups 2 and 3 received an injection (i.v.) of either furosemide (100 mg/kg) or bumetanide (70 mg/kg) in vehicle (DMSO) and Group 1 received vehicle alone. Immediately following injections, startle amplitudes were assessed during startle alone trials and startle plus fear (light followed by startle) trials. Fear potentiated startle (light + startle amplitudes minus startle alone amplitudes) was compared between the treatment groups.
Animals were trained and tested in four identical stabilimeter devices (MedAssociates). Briefly, each rat was placed in a small Plexiglas cylinder. The floor of each stabilimeter consisted of four 6-ram-diameter stainless steel bars spaced 18 mm apart through which shock can be delivered. Cylinder movements result in displacement of an accelerometer .where the resultant voltage is proportional to the velocity of the cage displacement. Startle amplitude is defined as the maximum accelerometer voltage that occurs during the first 0.25 sec after the startle stimulus is delivered. The analog output of the accelerometer was amplified, digitized on a scale of CM1096 units and stored on a microcomputer. Each stabilimeter was enclosed in a ventilated, light-, and sound- attenuating box. All sound level measurements were made with a Precision Sound Level Meter. The noise of a ventilating fan attached to a sidewall of each wooden box produced an overall background noise level of 64 dB. The startle stimulus was a 50 ms burst of white noise (5 ms rise-decay time) generated by a white noise generator. The visual conditioned stimulus employed was illumination of a light bulb adjacent to the white noise source. The unconditioned stimulus was a 0.6 mA foot shock with duration of 0.5 sec, generated by four constant-current shockers located outside the chamber. The presentation and sequencing of all stimuli were under the control of the microcomputer. FPS procedures consisted of 5 days of testing; during days 1 and 2 baseline startle responses were collected, days 3 and 4 light/shock pairings were delivered, day 5 testing for fear potentiated startle was conducted.
Matching: On the first two days all rats were placed in the Plexiglas cylinders and 3 min later presented with 30 startle stimuli at a 30 sec interstimulus interval. An intensity of 105 dB was used. The mean startle amplitude across the 30 startle stimuli on the second day was used to assign rats into treatment groups with similar means.
Training: On the following 2 days, rats were placed in the Plexiglas cylinders. Each day following 3 min after entry, 10 CS-shock pairings were delivered. The shock was delivered during the last 0.5 sec of the 3.7 sec CSs at an average intertrial interval of 4 min (range, 3-5 min).
Testing: Rats were placed in the same startle boxes where they were trained and after 3 min were presented with 18 startle-eliciting stimuli (all at 105 dB). These initial startle stimuli were used to again habituate the rats to the acoustic startle stimuli. Thirty seconds after the last of these stimuli, each animal received 60 startle stimuli with half of the stimuli presented alone (startle alone trials) and the other half presented 3.2 sec after the onset of the 3.7 sec CS (CS-startle trials). All startle stimuli are presented at a mean 30 sec interstimulus interval, randomly varying between 20 and 40 sec. Measures: The treatment groups were compared on the difference in startle amplitude between CS-startle and startle-alone trials (fear potentiation).
Fig. 6 shows the baseline startle amplitudes for each group of rats determined prior to the test day. Fig. 7 shows the amplitude of response on startle alone trials determined on the test day immediately following injection of either DMSO alone, bumetanide or furosemide, with Fig. 8 showing the difference score (startle alone - fear potentiated startle) on the test day. As shown in the figures, a statistically significantly lower difference score was observed in rats treated with either furosemide or bumetanide than in rats treated with vehicle alone, indicating that both furosemide and bumetanide are effective in reducing anxiety. Figs. 9 and 10 show the startle alone amplitude and the difference score, respectively, one week after treatment with either furosemide or bumetanide. Animals treated with either furosemide or bumetanide were found to have a higher difference score than animals treated with vehicle alone. However, as the error bars are so large for the vehicle-treated animals, the data does not imply any statistically significant difference between vehicle and bumetanide, with possibly a small difference between vehicle and furosemide.
Fig. 12 shows the difference score for animals treated with either vehicle alone (n=13), or 10 mg (n=13), 30 mg (n=13), 40 mg (n=5), 50 mg (n=13) or 70 mg (n=13) of bumetanide. Doses of 40 mg, 50 mg and 70 mg were found to be significantly more effective in reducing anxiety than doses of 10 mg or 30 mg.
EXAMPLE 85 Therapeutic Efficacy of Bumetanide Analogs in Alleviating Anxiety
The therapeutic efficacy of several bumetanide analogs in alleviating anxiety was examined using the fear potentiated startle (FPS) test in rats as described above.
Fig. 1 1 shows the difference score (startle alone - fear potentiated startle) on the test day in rats treated with one of the following bumetanide analogs: bumetanide N,N- diethylglycolamide ester (referred to as 2MIK053); bumetanide methyl ester (referred to as 3MIK054); bumetanide N,N-dimethylglycolamide ester (referred to as 3MIK069-11); bumetanide morpholinodethyl ester (referred to as 3MIK066-4); bumetanide pivaxetil ester (referred to as 3MIK069-12); bumetanide cyanomethyl ester (referred to as 3MIK047); bumetanide dibenzylamide (referred to as 3MIK065); or bumetanide 3- (dimethylaminoproply) ester (referred to as 3MIK066-5). The vehicle was DMSO. As can be seen from Fig. 11, the difference score obtained after administration of most of the bumetanide analogs was significantly lower than that observed following administration of vehicle alone, demonstrating that these analogs may be effectively employed to reduce anxiety.
In further studies, rats were injected with either bumetanide, saline or a bumetanide analog, and their urine output was measured. As shown in Fig. 13, bumetanide N,N-diethylglycolamide ester (column 2), bumetanide pivaxetil ester (column 3) and bumetanide cyanomethyl ester (column 4) showed significantly lower diuretic effects than bumetanide obtained from two different sources (columns 1 and 13). Column 6 represents the results obtained following administration of saline. While the present invention has been described with reference to the specific embodiments thereof, it will be understood by those skilled in the art that various changes may be made and equivalents may be substituted without departing from the true spirit and scope of the invention. In addition, many modifications may be made to adapt a particular situation, material, composition of matter, method, method step or steps, for use in practicing the present invention. All such modifications are intended to be within the scope of the claims appended hereto.
All patents and publications cited herein and PCT Application WO 00/37616, published June 29, 2000, are specifically incorporated by reference herein in their entireties.
SEQ ID NO: 1-2 are set out in the attached Sequence Listing. The codes for polynucleotide and polypeptide sequences used in the attached Sequence Listing conform to WIPO Standard ST.25 (1988), Appendix 2.

Claims

ClaimsWe claim:
1. A method for treating an anxiety disorder in a mammalian subject, comprising administering an effective amount of a composition comprising a Na+K+2C1 co-transporter antagonist to the subject.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein the Na+K+2C1 co-transporter antagonist reduces or blocks hypersynchronized neuronal population discharges by non- synaptic effects.
3. The method of claim 1, wherein the Na+K+2C1 co-transporter antagonist is a NKCCl co-transporter antagonist.
4. The method of claim 1 , wherein the Na+K+2C1 co-transporter antagonist is a CNS- targeted NKCC co-transporter antagonist.
5. The method of claim 4, wherein the Na+K+2C1 co-transporter antagonist is selected from the group consisting of: furosemide; .bumetanide; ethacrynic acid; torsemide; azosemide; muzolimine; piretanide; tripamide; and functional analogs and derivatives thereof.
6. The method of claim 1 , wherein the Na+K+2C1 co-transporter antagonist is selected from the group consisting of: thiazide; and thiazide-like diuretics.
7. The method of claim 1, wherein the Na+K+2C1 co-transporter antagonist is a compound of formula I:
Figure imgf000092_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, tautomer or hydrate thereof, wherein
Ri is not present, H or O;
R2 is H or when Ri is O, is selected from the group consisting of: alkylaminodialkyl, alkylaminocarbonyldialkyl, alkyloxycarbonylalkyl, alkylaldehyde, alkylketonealkyl, alkylamide, an alkylammonium group, alkylcarboxylic acid, alkylheteroaryls, alkylhydroxy, a biocompatible polymer, methyloxyalkyl, methyloxyalkaryl, methylthioalkylalkyl and methylthioalkaryl, unsubstituted or substituted, and when Ri is not present, R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, dialkylamino, diarylamino, dialkylaminodialkyl, dialkylcarbonylaminodialkyl, dialkylesteralkyl, dialkylaldehyde, dialkylketonealkyl, dialkylamido, dialkylcarboxylic acid, and dialkylheteroaryls, unsubstituted or substituted;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of: aryl, halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, and aryloxy, unsubstituted or substituted; and
R4 and R5 are each independently selected from the group consisting of: hydrogen, alkylaminodialkyl, alkylhydroxyaminodiakyl, unsubstituted or substituted.
8. The method of claim 7, wherein the Na+K+2C1 co-transporter antagonist, is selected from the group consisting of: bumetanide aldehyde; bumetanide dibenzylamide; bumetanide diethylamide; bumetanide morpholinoethyl ester; bumetanide 3-(dimethylaminopropyl) ester; bumetanide N,N-diethylglycolamide ester; bumetanide dimethylglycolamide ester; bumetanide pivaxetil ester; bumetanide benzyltrimethyl-ammonium salt; and bumetanide cetyltrimethylammonium salt.
9. The method of claim 1, wherein the Na+K+2C1 co-transporter antagonist is a compound of formula II:
Figure imgf000093_0001
II or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, tautomer or hydrate thereof, wherein
Ri is not present, H or O;
R2 is H or when Ri is O, is selected from the group consisting of: alkylaminodialkyl, alkylaminocarbonyldialkyl, alkyloxycarbonylalkyl, alkylaldehyde, alkylketonealkyl, alkylamide, an alkylammonium group, alkylcarboxylic acid, alkylheteroaryls, alkylhydroxy, a biocompatible polymer, methyloxyalkyl, methyloxyalkaryl, methylthioalkylalkyl and methylthioalkaryl, unsubstituted or substituted, and when Ri is not present, R2 is selected from the group consisting of: hydrogen, dialkylamino, diarylamino, dialkylaminodialkyl, dialkylcarbonylaminodialkyl, dialkylesteralkyl, dialkylaldehyde, dialkylketonealkyl, dialkylamido, dialkylcarboxylic acid, and dialkylheteroaryls, unsubstituted or substituted;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of aryl, halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, and aryloxy, unsubstituted or substituted; and
R4 and R5 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkylaminodialkyl, alkylhydroxyaminodiakyl, unsubstituted or substituted;
10. The method of claim 9, wherein the Na+K+2C1 co-transporter antagonist is selected from the group consisting of: furosemide aldehyde; furosemide ethyl ester; furosemide cyanomethyl ester; furosemide benzyl ester; furosemide morpholinoethyl ester; furosemide 3-(dimethylaminopropyl) ester; furosemide N,N-diethylglycolamide ester; furosemide dibenzylamide; furosemide benzyltrimethylammonium salt; furosemide cetyltrimethylammonium salt; furosemide N,N-dimethylglycolamide ester; furosemide pivaxetil ester; and furosemide propaxetil ester.
11. The method of claim 1, wherein the Na+K+2C1 co-transporter antagonist is a compound of formula III:
Figure imgf000094_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, tautomer or hydrate thereof, wherein
Ri is not present, H or O;
R2 is H or when Ri is O, is selected from the group consisting of: alkylaminodialkyl, alkylaminocarbonyldialkyl, alkyloxycarbonylalkyl, alkylaldehyde, alkylketonealkyl, alkylamide, an alkylammonium group, alkylcarboxylic acid, alkylheteroaryls, alkylhydroxy, a biocompatible polymer, methyloxyalkyl, methyloxyalkaryl, methylthioalkylalkyl and methylthioalkaryl, unsubstituted or substituted, and when Ri is not present, R2 is selected from the group consisting of: hydrogen, dialkylamino, diarylamino, dialkylaminodialkyl, dialkylcarbonylaminodialkyl, dialkylesteralkyl, dialkylaldehyde, dialkylketonealkyl, dialkylamido, dialkylcarboxylic acid, and dialkylheteroaryls, unsubstituted or substituted;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of: aryl, halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, and aryloxy, unsubstituted or substituted; and
R4 and R5 are each independently selected from the group consisting of: hydrogen, alkylaminodialkyl, alkylhydroxyaminodiakyl, unsubstituted or substituted.
12. The method of claim 11, wherein the Na+K+2C1 co-transporter antagonist is selected from the group consisting of: piretanide aldehyde; piretanide methyl ester; piretanide cyanomethyl ester; piretanide benzyl ester; piretanide morpholinoethyl ester; piretanide 3- (dimethylaminopropyl) ester; piretanide N,N-diethylglycolamide ester; piretanide diethylamide; piretanide dibenzylamide; piretanide benzylltrimethylammonium salt; piretanide cetylltrimethylammonium salt; piretanide N,N-dimethylglycolamide ester; piretanide pivaxetil ester; and piretanide propaxetil ester.
13. The method of claim 1, wherein the Na+K+2C1 co-transporter antagonist is a compound of formula IV
Figure imgf000095_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, tautomer or hydrate thereof, wherein
R3 is selected from the group consisting of: aryl, halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, and aryloxy, unsubstituted or substituted;
R4 and R5 are each independently selected from the group consisting of: hydrogen, alkylaminodialkyl, alkylhydroxyaminodiakyl, unsubstituted or substituted; and
R6 is selected from the group consisting of alkyloxycarbonylalkyl, alkylaminocarbonyldialkyl, alkylaminodialkyl, alkylhydroxy, a biocompatible polymer, methyloxyalkyl, methyloxyalkaryl, methylthioalkyl and methylthioalkaryl, unsubstituted or substituted.
14. The method of claim 13, wherein the Na+K+2C1 co-transporter antagonist is selected from the group consisting of: tetrazolyl-substituted azosemide; azosemide benzyltrimethylammonium salt; and azosemide cetyltrimethylammonium salt.
15. The method of claim 1, wherein the Na+K+2C1 co-transporter antagonist is a compound of formula V
Figure imgf000096_0001
V
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, tautomer, zwitterion or hydrate thereof, wherein
R7 is selected from the group consisting of: alkyloxycarbonylalkyl, alkylaminocarbonyldialkyl, alkylaminodialkyl, alkylhydroxy, a biocompatible polymer, methyloxyalkyl, methyloxyalkaryl, methylthioalkyl and methylthioalkaryl, unsubstituted or substituted; and X" is bromide, chloride, fluoride, iodide, mesylate, tosylate; or alternatively, X" is not present.
16. The method of claim 15, wherein the Na+K+2C1 co-transporter antagonist is a pyridine-substituted torsemide quaternary ammonium salt.
17. The method of claim 6, wherein the Na+K+2C1 co-transporter antagonist is selected from the group consisting of: bendroflumethiazide; benzthiazide; chlorothiazide; hydrochlorothiazide; hydro-flumethiazide; methylclothiazide; polythiazide; trichlormethiazide; chlorthalidone; indapamide; metolazone; quinethazone; and functional analogs and derivatives thereof.
18. The method of claim 1, wherein the Na+K+2C1 co-transporter antagonist modulates extracellular ion composition and chloride gradients in nervous system tissue.
19. The method of claim 1, wherein the composition is delivered orally, sublingually, nasally, transdermally, intravenously, intrathecally, or by inhalation.
20. The method of claim 1, wherein the anxiety disorder is selected from the group consisting of: panic disorder; social anxiety disorder; obsessive compulsive disorder; posttraumatic stress disorder; generalized anxiety disorder; and specific phobia.
PCT/US2005/043177 2005-04-07 2005-11-30 Methods and compositions for the treatment of anxiety disorders WO2006110187A2 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP05852434A EP1874286A4 (en) 2005-04-07 2005-11-30 Methods and compositions for the treatment of anxiety disorders
CA002604446A CA2604446A1 (en) 2005-04-07 2005-11-30 Methods and compositions for the treatment of anxiety disorders
JP2008505285A JP2008535836A (en) 2005-04-07 2005-11-30 Methods and compositions for the treatment of anxiety disorders

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US11/101,000 2005-04-07
US11/101,000 US8722668B2 (en) 1998-12-23 2005-04-07 Methods and compositions for the treatment of neuropathic pain and neuropsychiatric disorders
US11/130,945 US20060025387A1 (en) 1998-12-23 2005-05-17 Compositions and methods for the treatment of disorders of the central and peripheral nervous systems
US11/130,945 2005-05-17
US11/251,724 US8008283B2 (en) 1998-12-23 2005-10-17 Methods and compositions for the treatment of neuropsychiatric disorders
US11/251,724 2005-10-17

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2006110187A2 true WO2006110187A2 (en) 2006-10-19
WO2006110187A3 WO2006110187A3 (en) 2007-04-26

Family

ID=37087469

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2005/043177 WO2006110187A2 (en) 2005-04-07 2005-11-30 Methods and compositions for the treatment of anxiety disorders

Country Status (3)

Country Link
US (3) US8008283B2 (en)
EP (1) EP1874286A4 (en)
WO (1) WO2006110187A2 (en)

Cited By (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2007047447A3 (en) * 2005-10-17 2007-06-21 Neurotherapeutics Pharma Llc Diuretic-like compound analogs useful for regulation of central nervous system disorders
WO2011086126A1 (en) 2010-01-15 2011-07-21 INSERM (Institut National de la Santé et de la Recherche Médicale) Compounds for the treatment of autism
US8008283B2 (en) 1998-12-23 2011-08-30 Neurotherapeutics Pharma, Inc. Methods and compositions for the treatment of neuropsychiatric disorders
EP2732815A1 (en) 2012-11-16 2014-05-21 Neurochlore Modulators of intracellular chloride concentration for treating fragile X syndrome
EP2808391A1 (en) 2013-05-31 2014-12-03 Neurochlore Modulators of intracellular chloride concentration for treating neurodegenerative diseases with parkinsonian syndromes
WO2015091857A1 (en) 2013-12-20 2015-06-25 Fondazione Istituto Italiano Di Tecnologia Modulators of intracellular chloride concentration for treating down syndrome
US9616075B2 (en) 2012-07-20 2017-04-11 University Of Rochester Method of treating and preventing brain impairment using Na+-K+-2Cl-cotransporter isoform 1 inhibitors
US11986659B2 (en) 2018-03-22 2024-05-21 Research Foundation Of The City University Of New York Modulation of neuronal NKCC1 as a therapeutic strategy for spasticity and related disorders

Families Citing this family (24)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7214711B2 (en) * 1998-12-23 2007-05-08 Neurotherapeutics Pharma Llc Method of treating migraine headache without aura
US8722668B2 (en) * 1998-12-23 2014-05-13 Daryl W. Hochman Methods and compositions for the treatment of neuropathic pain and neuropsychiatric disorders
US20090069267A1 (en) * 2006-01-17 2009-03-12 Abrams Daniel J Central administration of stable formulations of therapeutic agents for cns conditions
CA2669117A1 (en) * 2006-10-26 2008-05-02 Gary A. Flynn Aquaporin modulators and methods of using them for the treatment of edema and fluid imbalance
EP2202228B1 (en) 2007-10-15 2014-12-10 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Amide compounds and use of the same
US20100317715A1 (en) * 2007-12-21 2010-12-16 Vollrath Benedikt Methods for treating neuropsychiatric conditions
US20120004225A1 (en) * 2009-01-22 2012-01-05 Neurotherapeutics Pharma, Inc. Bumetanide, furosemide, piretanide, azosemide, and torsemide analogs, compositions and methods of use
US8977362B2 (en) 2010-04-27 2015-03-10 Rhode Island Hospital Peripheral pain management
US9669213B2 (en) * 2011-01-24 2017-06-06 David Tsai Stimulation method for maintaining the responsiveness of electrically excitable cells to repeated electrical stimulation
WO2012134965A1 (en) * 2011-03-25 2012-10-04 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Chloride channel and chloride transporter modulators for therapy in smooth muscle diseases
US9681836B2 (en) 2012-04-23 2017-06-20 Cyberonics, Inc. Methods, systems and apparatuses for detecting seizure and non-seizure states
US9616114B1 (en) 2014-09-18 2017-04-11 David Gordon Bermudes Modified bacteria having improved pharmacokinetics and tumor colonization enhancing antitumor activity
MX2018003462A (en) 2015-09-22 2018-09-06 Graybug Vision Inc Compounds and compositions for the treatment of ocular disorders.
US10172517B2 (en) * 2016-02-25 2019-01-08 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Image-analysis for assessing heart failure
US11129906B1 (en) 2016-12-07 2021-09-28 David Gordon Bermudes Chimeric protein toxins for expression by therapeutic bacteria
US11180535B1 (en) 2016-12-07 2021-11-23 David Gordon Bermudes Saccharide binding, tumor penetration, and cytotoxic antitumor chimeric peptides from therapeutic bacteria
BR112019019452A2 (en) 2017-03-23 2020-04-14 Graybug Vision Inc compound, and, use of a compound
EP3388520A1 (en) * 2017-04-11 2018-10-17 INSERM (Institut National de la Santé et de la Recherche Médicale) Methods and pharmaceutical composition for reducing the expression of nkcc1 in a subject in need thereof
AU2018265415A1 (en) 2017-05-10 2019-10-31 Graybug Vision, Inc. Extended release microparticles and suspensions thereof for medical therapy
KR20200143413A (en) * 2018-04-06 2020-12-23 지렌틴 아게 Bumetanide derivatives for the treatment of hyperhidrosis
US11471497B1 (en) 2019-03-13 2022-10-18 David Gordon Bermudes Copper chelation therapeutics
US10973908B1 (en) 2020-05-14 2021-04-13 David Gordon Bermudes Expression of SARS-CoV-2 spike protein receptor binding domain in attenuated salmonella as a vaccine
WO2022006392A1 (en) * 2020-07-01 2022-01-06 Neuropro Therapeutics, Inc. Novel pharmaceutical compositions
US20230390230A1 (en) * 2021-12-30 2023-12-07 Neuropro Therapeutics, Inc. Pharmaceutical composition

Family Cites Families (102)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3058882A (en) * 1959-12-28 1962-10-16 Hoechst Ag N'-substituted-3-carboxy-6-halo-sulfanilamide and derivatives thereof
DE1815922C3 (en) * 1968-12-20 1979-04-26 Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh, 6800 Mannheim 5-phenyltetrazole derivatives
US3971819A (en) * 1968-12-24 1976-07-27 Lovens Kemiske Fabrik Produktionsaktieselskab 3-Amino, 4-thio-substituted, 5-sulphamyl-benzoic acid derivatives
GB1249490A (en) * 1968-12-24 1971-10-13 Leo Pharm Prod Ltd New sulphamyl-benzoic acid derivatives
US3985777A (en) * 1968-12-24 1976-10-12 Lovens Kemiske Fabrik Produktionsaktieselskab Sulphamyl-benzoic acid derivatives
US3806354A (en) * 1969-07-01 1974-04-23 Xerox Corp Method of cyclically developing electrostatic latent images
US3634583A (en) * 1969-07-24 1972-01-11 Leo Pharm Prod Ltd Pharmaceutical composition for the treatment of oedematous conditions and hypertension
US3676454A (en) * 1970-08-31 1972-07-11 Kendall & Co Acyloxymethyl derivatives of diphenylhydantoin
US3808534A (en) * 1972-11-15 1974-04-30 United Aircraft Corp Intrinsically powered electronic monitor for fuel cells
NL7411618A (en) * 1973-09-07 1975-03-11 Hoechst Ag PROCESS FOR PREPARING SUBSTITUTED AMINOBENZOIC ACID DERIVATIVES.
JPS5811874B2 (en) * 1974-03-25 1983-03-04 武田薬品工業株式会社 Pyrido (3,4-D) Pyridazine Luino Seizouhou
GB1477664A (en) * 1974-04-17 1977-06-22 Christiaens Sa A Pyridine derivatives
DE2419970C3 (en) * 1974-04-25 1980-06-12 Hoechst Ag, 6000 Frankfurt 3- <1-Pyrrolidinyl) -4-phenoxy-5sulfamoylbenzoic acid and process for its preparation
DE2517183A1 (en) 1975-04-18 1976-10-28 Hoechst Ag BASIC SUBSTITUTED 5-SULFAMOYL-ANTHRANILIC ACID DERIVATIVES AND PROCESS FOR THEIR PRODUCTION
JPS51151384A (en) * 1975-06-20 1976-12-25 Olympus Optical Co Ltd Process for cultivating organic tissue or cells automatically
US4247550A (en) * 1975-07-08 1981-01-27 Leo Pharmaceutical Products Ltd. A/S (Lovens Kemiske Fabrik Produktionsaktieselskab) Compositions and methods for the treatment of hypertension or oedemas
US4261985A (en) * 1978-11-22 1981-04-14 Ciba-Geigy Corporation Novel diuretics
US4309348A (en) * 1979-05-14 1982-01-05 American Home Products Corporation Tricyclic indole derivatives
US4340737A (en) * 1979-05-29 1982-07-20 Pfizer Inc. 9-Hydroxyoctahydrobenzo[C]quinolines and intermediates therefor
US4351833A (en) * 1980-07-28 1982-09-28 Pfizer Inc. 9-Amino-1-hydroxyoctahydrobenzo[c]quinolines and derivatives thereof as analgesics and anti-emetics
US4736307A (en) * 1982-04-21 1988-04-05 Neuroscience, Inc. Microcomputer-based system for the on-line analysis and topographic display of human brain electrical activity
GB8308126D0 (en) * 1983-03-24 1983-05-05 Bloch M Pharmaceutical compositions
FI834309A (en) * 1983-11-24 1985-05-25 Pharmaconsult Oy SALTBLANDNING.
US4855289A (en) * 1984-06-04 1989-08-08 Wester Per O Combination of two active substances
US5318024A (en) * 1985-03-22 1994-06-07 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Laser endoscope for spectroscopic imaging
US4663348A (en) * 1985-07-02 1987-05-05 Warner-Lambert Co. Furosemide salts and pharmaceutical preparations thereof
US5256687A (en) * 1985-09-09 1993-10-26 Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft Pharmaceutical composition for the treatment of high blood pressure
JPS62247232A (en) * 1986-04-21 1987-10-28 Agency Of Ind Science & Technol Fluorescence measuring apparatus
DK406686D0 (en) * 1986-08-26 1986-08-26 Hans Bundgaard carboxylic acid derivatives
US4895807A (en) * 1986-12-31 1990-01-23 Cherksey Bruce D Membrane channel protein and related therapeutic compounds
GB2207129A (en) 1987-07-13 1989-01-25 Leo Pharm Prod Ltd N-(1-carboxy-3-phenylpropyl)alanyl derivatives
JPH01211582A (en) * 1988-02-16 1989-08-24 Tanabe Seiyaku Co Ltd Benzodioxole derivative
US4972331A (en) * 1989-02-06 1990-11-20 Nim, Inc. Phase modulated spectrophotometry
US5034109A (en) * 1989-04-20 1991-07-23 Kansai Paint Company, Limited Resin coating compositions and electrophoretic coating method using same
US5201318A (en) * 1989-04-24 1993-04-13 Rava Richard P Contour mapping of spectral diagnostics
US5369496A (en) * 1989-11-13 1994-11-29 Research Foundation Of City College Of New York Noninvasive method and apparatus for characterizing biological materials
US5114957A (en) * 1990-05-08 1992-05-19 Biodor U.S. Holding Tocopherol-based antiviral agents and method of using same
US5438989A (en) * 1990-08-10 1995-08-08 Hochman; Darryl Solid tumor, cortical function, and nerve tissue imaging methods and device
US5845639A (en) * 1990-08-10 1998-12-08 Board Of Regents Of The University Of Washington Optical imaging methods
US5699798A (en) * 1990-08-10 1997-12-23 University Of Washington Method for optically imaging solid tumor tissue
US5215095A (en) * 1990-08-10 1993-06-01 University Technologies International Optical imaging system for neurosurgery
US5465718A (en) * 1990-08-10 1995-11-14 Hochman; Daryl Solid tumor, cortical function, and nerve tissue imaging methods and device
US5128327A (en) * 1991-03-25 1992-07-07 Merck & Co., Inc. Angiotensin II antagonists incorporating a nitrogen containing six membered ring heterocycle
US5486530A (en) * 1991-04-27 1996-01-23 Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh Use of torasemide for the treatment of brain oedemas
US5162325A (en) * 1991-05-07 1992-11-10 Merck & Co., Inc. Angiotensin ii antagonists incorporating a substituted benzyl element
CA2042075C (en) * 1991-05-08 2001-01-23 Branko Palcic Endoscopic imaging system
GB9125485D0 (en) * 1991-11-29 1992-01-29 Merck Sharp & Dohme Therapeutic agents
US5658786A (en) * 1992-03-04 1997-08-19 Synaptic Pharmaceutical Corporation DNA encoding rat taurine transporter and uses thereof
US5772597A (en) * 1992-09-14 1998-06-30 Sextant Medical Corporation Surgical tool end effector
DE4238994A1 (en) * 1992-11-19 1994-05-26 Basf Ag Aniline as a marking agent for mineral oils
US5413108A (en) * 1993-04-21 1995-05-09 The Research Foundation Of City College Of New York Method and apparatus for mapping a tissue sample for and distinguishing different regions thereof based on luminescence measurements of cancer-indicative native fluorophor
US5721263A (en) * 1993-06-07 1998-02-24 Takeda Chemical Industries, Ltd. Pharmaceutical composition for angiotensin II-mediated diseases
US5498519A (en) * 1993-07-29 1996-03-12 Ramot-University Authority For Applied Research And Industrial Development Ltd. Hypothermic preservation of mammalian hearts by blocking the Na+ /K+ /Cl- co-transporter using the co-transporter blocker, furosemide
IL119767A (en) * 1993-08-13 1998-02-08 Sophis View Tech Ltd System and method for diagnosis of living tissue diseases
US5464854A (en) * 1993-11-11 1995-11-07 Depadova; Anathony S. Method of modifying ovarian hormone-regulated AT1 receptor activity as treatment of incapacitating symptom(s) of P.M.S.
US5865738A (en) * 1993-12-10 1999-02-02 Regents Of The University Of California Tissue viability monitor
DE4417004A1 (en) * 1994-05-13 1995-11-16 Hoechst Ag Perfluoroalkyl-substituted benzoylguanidines, process for their preparation, their use as a medicament or diagnostic agent, and medicament containing them
EP0721581B1 (en) * 1994-06-30 2001-10-17 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Device for and method of carrying out optical measurements in turbid media
US5763491A (en) * 1994-12-09 1998-06-09 The Regents Of The University Of California Method for enhancing outflow of aqueous humor in treatment of glaucoma
US6228873B1 (en) * 1994-12-09 2001-05-08 The Regents Of The University Of California Method for enhancing outflow of aqueous humor in treatment of glaucoma
US5585401A (en) * 1994-12-09 1996-12-17 The Reents Of The University Of California Method for enhancing outflow of aqueous humor in treatment of glaucoma
US5660181A (en) * 1994-12-12 1997-08-26 Physical Optics Corporation Hybrid neural network and multiple fiber probe for in-depth 3-D mapping
DE4445683A1 (en) * 1994-12-21 1996-06-27 Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh Method for examining a scattering medium with intensity-modulated light
US5834466A (en) * 1994-12-22 1998-11-10 The Regents Of The University Of California Method for protecting of heart by limiting metabolic and ionic abnormalities developed during ischemia, following ischemia or resulting from ischemia
US5706821A (en) * 1994-12-30 1998-01-13 Hamamatsu Photonics K.K. Spectroscopic method for quantitatively determining the change of concentration of a light or other radiation absorbing compound in a medium which is interrogated through an intervening medium
DE19504174A1 (en) * 1995-02-07 1996-08-08 Siemens Ag Method for the spectroscopic examination of a biological tissue
WO1996024358A1 (en) * 1995-02-10 1996-08-15 G.D. Searle & Co. Use of low dose amount of spironolactone for treatment of cardiovascular disease
US5902732A (en) * 1995-10-04 1999-05-11 Cytoscan Sciences Llc Drug screening process measuring changes in cell volume
ZA9610741B (en) * 1995-12-22 1997-06-24 Warner Lambert Co 4-Substituted piperidine analogs and their use as subtype selective nmda receptor antagonists
US5654335A (en) * 1996-02-23 1997-08-05 University Of Iowa Research Foundation Topical use of ethyl ethacrynate for glaucoma treatment
TW430660B (en) * 1996-05-30 2001-04-21 Mochida Pharm Co Ltd Novel benzindole derivatives for neuron cell protection, processes for production, and the pharmaceutical compounds containing them
US5866074A (en) * 1996-12-20 1999-02-02 Baxter International Inc. Systems for quantifying the illumination characteristics of vessels such as blood processing containers with respect to light energy
US6432986B2 (en) * 1997-07-21 2002-08-13 Bruce H. Levin Compositions, kits, and methods for inhibiting cerebral neurovascular disorders and muscular headaches
US6395781B1 (en) * 1998-02-26 2002-05-28 Mcw Research Foundation 20-HETE antagonists and agonists
US6834238B1 (en) * 1998-06-08 2004-12-21 Cytoscan Sciences Llc Method for identifying optical contrast enhancing agents
US6495601B1 (en) * 1998-12-23 2002-12-17 Cytoscan Sciences Llc Methods and compositions for treating conditions of the central and peripheral nervous systems using non-synaptic mechanisms
US20060025387A1 (en) * 1998-12-23 2006-02-02 Cytoscan Sciences Llc Compositions and methods for the treatment of disorders of the central and peripheral nervous systems
WO2000037616A1 (en) 1998-12-23 2000-06-29 Cytoscan Sciences L.L.C. Compounds, methods of screening and methods of treatment for central and peripheral nervous system disorders
US8722668B2 (en) * 1998-12-23 2014-05-13 Daryl W. Hochman Methods and compositions for the treatment of neuropathic pain and neuropsychiatric disorders
US7214711B2 (en) * 1998-12-23 2007-05-08 Neurotherapeutics Pharma Llc Method of treating migraine headache without aura
US8008283B2 (en) 1998-12-23 2011-08-30 Neurotherapeutics Pharma, Inc. Methods and compositions for the treatment of neuropsychiatric disorders
GB9922963D0 (en) * 1999-09-28 1999-12-01 Pfizer Ltd Polymorphic salt
US6669951B2 (en) * 1999-08-24 2003-12-30 Cellgate, Inc. Compositions and methods for enhancing drug delivery across and into epithelial tissues
US20020147197A1 (en) * 1999-10-08 2002-10-10 Newman Michael J. Methods and compositions for enhancing pharmaceutical treatments
CN1414863A (en) * 1999-12-30 2003-04-30 亨德森莫利研究和开发有限公司 Treatment of DNA viral infections
WO2002051441A1 (en) * 2000-12-26 2002-07-04 Sankyo Company, Limited Medicinal compositions containing diuretic and insulin resistance-improving agent
US20050203169A1 (en) * 2001-08-06 2005-09-15 Moskowitz David W. Methods and compositions for treating diseases associated with excesses in ACE
AU2002355419A1 (en) * 2001-08-06 2003-02-24 Genomed, Llc Methods and compositions for treating diseases associated with excesses in ace
EP1481078A4 (en) * 2002-02-22 2006-08-16 New River Pharmaceuticals Inc Use of peptide-drug conjugation to reduce inter-subject variability of drug serum levels
DE10223932A1 (en) * 2002-05-29 2003-12-18 Rudolf Wank Use of diuretics to treat swelling
EP1624936B1 (en) * 2003-05-16 2009-10-28 Universite Laval Cns chloride modulation and uses thereof
AU2004270162B2 (en) * 2003-08-28 2010-05-13 Nicox S.A. Nitrosated ad nitrosylated diuretic compouds, compositions and methods of use
WO2005082350A1 (en) 2004-02-20 2005-09-09 Aventis Pharmaceuticals Inc. Furosemide derivatives as modulators of hm74 and their use for the treatment of inflammation
CA2588597A1 (en) 2004-11-23 2006-06-01 Celgene Corporation Methods and compositions using immunomodulatory compounds for treatment and management of central nervous system injury
CA2531552C (en) * 2005-08-08 2013-02-26 Bce Inc Method, system and apparatus for controlling a voice recorder
US20070043034A1 (en) * 2005-08-16 2007-02-22 Kevin Staley Chlorine Ion Uptake Modulators and Uses Thereof
EP1940841B9 (en) 2005-10-07 2017-04-19 Guerbet Compounds comprising a biological target recognizing part, coupled to a signal part capable of complexing gallium
JP2009511629A (en) * 2005-10-17 2009-03-19 ニューロセラピューティクス ファーマ， インコーポレイテッド Analogues of diuretic-like compounds useful in the regulation of central nervous system diseases
US20070085269A1 (en) * 2005-10-17 2007-04-19 Martin Paul E Jr User-customizable children's puzzles
WO2007079470A2 (en) * 2006-01-03 2007-07-12 Algebra, Inc. Therapeutic amine-arylsulfonamide conjugate compounds
WO2007149283A2 (en) * 2006-06-16 2007-12-27 Novacardia, Inc. Use of kw-3902 for achieving diuresis in patients with congestive heart failure and acute fluid overload
CA2669117A1 (en) 2006-10-26 2008-05-02 Gary A. Flynn Aquaporin modulators and methods of using them for the treatment of edema and fluid imbalance

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See references of EP1874286A4 *

Cited By (15)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8008283B2 (en) 1998-12-23 2011-08-30 Neurotherapeutics Pharma, Inc. Methods and compositions for the treatment of neuropsychiatric disorders
WO2007047447A3 (en) * 2005-10-17 2007-06-21 Neurotherapeutics Pharma Llc Diuretic-like compound analogs useful for regulation of central nervous system disorders
US9415028B2 (en) 2010-01-15 2016-08-16 Inserm (Institut National De La Sante Et De La Recherche Medicale) Compounds for the treatment of autism
WO2011086126A1 (en) 2010-01-15 2011-07-21 INSERM (Institut National de la Santé et de la Recherche Médicale) Compounds for the treatment of autism
US9592214B2 (en) 2010-01-15 2017-03-14 Inserm (Institut National De La Sante Et De La Recherche Medicale) Compounds for the treatment of autism in a baby child
US9616075B2 (en) 2012-07-20 2017-04-11 University Of Rochester Method of treating and preventing brain impairment using Na+-K+-2Cl-cotransporter isoform 1 inhibitors
EP2732815A1 (en) 2012-11-16 2014-05-21 Neurochlore Modulators of intracellular chloride concentration for treating fragile X syndrome
US20150335600A1 (en) * 2012-11-16 2015-11-26 Neurochlore Modulators of intracellular chloride concentration for treating fragile x syndrome
WO2014076235A1 (en) 2012-11-16 2014-05-22 Neurochlore Modulators of intracellular chloride concentration for treating fragile x syndrome
US10201507B2 (en) 2012-11-16 2019-02-12 Neurochlore Modulators of intracellular chloride concentration for treating fragile X syndrome
EP2808391A1 (en) 2013-05-31 2014-12-03 Neurochlore Modulators of intracellular chloride concentration for treating neurodegenerative diseases with parkinsonian syndromes
US9974763B2 (en) 2013-05-31 2018-05-22 B&A Therapeutics Modulators of intracellular chloride concentration for treating neurodegenerative diseases with Parkinsonian Syndromes
WO2015091857A1 (en) 2013-12-20 2015-06-25 Fondazione Istituto Italiano Di Tecnologia Modulators of intracellular chloride concentration for treating down syndrome
US9822368B2 (en) 2013-12-20 2017-11-21 Fondazione Istituto Italiano Di Tecnologia Modulators of intracellular chloride concentration for treating down syndrome
US11986659B2 (en) 2018-03-22 2024-05-21 Research Foundation Of The City University Of New York Modulation of neuronal NKCC1 as a therapeutic strategy for spasticity and related disorders

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20090215754A1 (en) 2009-08-27
US20060089350A1 (en) 2006-04-27
WO2006110187A3 (en) 2007-04-26
EP1874286A4 (en) 2009-07-01
EP1874286A2 (en) 2008-01-09
US20120108640A1 (en) 2012-05-03
US8008283B2 (en) 2011-08-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US8008283B2 (en) Methods and compositions for the treatment of neuropsychiatric disorders
US8722668B2 (en) Methods and compositions for the treatment of neuropathic pain and neuropsychiatric disorders
US20240009153A1 (en) Bumetanide analogs, compositions and methods of use
US20060025387A1 (en) Compositions and methods for the treatment of disorders of the central and peripheral nervous systems
JP6861764B2 (en) Methods and compositions for promoting axonal regeneration and neural function
US20070149526A1 (en) Diuretic and diuretic-like compound analogs
US20190343783A1 (en) Pharmaceutical composition containing niclosamide for treating axin-gsk3 interaction-related diseases
JP6592702B1 (en) Amide derivatives as Nav1.7 and Nav1.8 blockers
CN101820848B (en) Compositions and methods of inhibiting n-acylethanolamine-hydrolyzing acid amidase
AU2016366680A1 (en) Benzothiophene-based selective estrogen receptor downregulators
JP2009102330A (en) Method and composition for treatment of anxiety disorder
JP2011231094A (en) Bumetanide, furosemide, piretanide, azosemide, and torsemide analogs, composition and method of use
JP2008535836A5 (en)
Zhu et al. Discovery of a novel vascular disrupting agent inhibiting tubulin polymerization and HDACs with potent antitumor effects
AU2015240775B2 (en) Sigma-2 receptor ligand drug conjugates as antitumor compounds, methods of synthesis and uses thereof
TW201130482A (en) Medicament
ES2689665T3 (en) Compounds and methods to treat leukemia
EP1937242A2 (en) Methods and compositions for the treatment of neuropsychiatric and addictive disorders
CA2604446A1 (en) Methods and compositions for the treatment of anxiety disorders
CA2625362A1 (en) Methods and compositions for the treatment of neuropsychiatric and addictive disorders
MX2008004951A (en) Methods and compositions for the treatment of neuropsychiatric and addictive disorders
Zhu et al. Synthesis and bioevaluation of novel stilbene-based derivatives as tubulin/HDAC dual-target inhibitors with potent antitumor activities in vitro and in vivo
WO2013090991A1 (en) Tgf-beta therapy
WO2023172594A2 (en) Method for treating rheumatoid arthritis (ra) using an enzyme-and substrate selective exosite inhibitor of a disintegrin and metalloprotease 10 (adam10)

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2008505285

Country of ref document: JP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2604446

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2005852434

Country of ref document: EP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: RU

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2005852434

Country of ref document: EP